Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 338
1 of 338

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual PDF

S-Class Coupe Operator's Manual

Order no. P217 0013 13 Part no. 217 584 85 02 Edition A 2017

2175848502l 2175848502

S-C las

sC ou pe

Op era

tor 's Ma

nu al

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with- out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstra e 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are reg- istered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of John- son Controls. RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft and Windows media are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- gers that could lead to damage to your vehi- cle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells youwhere you can find more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Display This text indicates a message on the multifunction display/multimedia dis- play.

As at 01.10.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- cle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains infor- mative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the afore- mentioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi- media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet TheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro- vides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys- tem. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle andmultimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tab- lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2175848502 2175848502l

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24 Introduction ........................................... 24 Operation ............................................... 24

Introduction ......................................... 25 Protecting the environment ................... 25 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25 Operator's Manual ................................. 26 Service and vehicle operation ................ 26 Operating safety .................................... 28 QR codes for the rescue card ................ 30 Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30 Information on copyright ....................... 32

At a glance ........................................... 33 Cockpit .................................................. 33 Instrument cluster ................................. 34 Multifunction steering wheel ................. 35 Center console ...................................... 37 Overhead control panel ......................... 38 Door control panel ................................. 39 Rear seats ............................................. 40

Safety ................................................... 41 Panic alarm ............................................ 41 Occupant safety .................................... 41 Children in the vehicle ........................... 57 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 61 Driving safety systems ........................... 61 Protection against theft ......................... 71

Opening and closing ........................... 72 SmartKey ............................................... 72 Doors ..................................................... 78 Trunk ..................................................... 80 Side windows ......................................... 85 Panorama roof ....................................... 88

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91 Correct driver's seat position ................ 91 Seats ..................................................... 91 Steering wheel ....................................... 98

Mirrors ................................................. 100 Memory function ................................. 102

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 104 Exterior lighting ................................... 104 Interior lighting .................................... 108 Replacing bulbs ................................... 108 Windshield wipers ................................ 108

Climate control ................................. 111 Overview of climate control systems ... 111 Operating the climate control sys- tems .................................................... 113 Setting the air vents ............................ 118

Driving and parking .......................... 120 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 120 Driving ................................................. 120 Automatic transmission ....................... 128 Refueling ............................................. 135 Parking ................................................ 137 Driving tips .......................................... 140 Driving systems ................................... 145

On-board computer and displays .... 186 Important safety notes ........................ 186 Displays and operation ........................ 186 Menus and submenus ......................... 189 Display messages ................................ 203 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 231

Multimedia system ........................... 242 General notes ...................................... 242 Important safety notes ........................ 242 Function restrictions ............................ 242 Operating system ................................ 243

Stowage and features ...................... 253 Stowage areas ..................................... 253 Features .............................................. 257

Maintenance and care ...................... 273 Engine compartment ........................... 273

2 Contents

ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 278 Care ..................................................... 280

Breakdown assistance ..................... 288 Where will I find...? .............................. 288 Flat tire ................................................ 288 Battery (vehicle) .................................. 292 Jump-starting ....................................... 295 Towing and tow-starting ...................... 298 Fuses ................................................... 301

Wheels and tires ............................... 303 Important safety notes ........................ 303 Operation ............................................ 303 Winter operation .................................. 305 Tire pressure ....................................... 306 Loading the vehicle .............................. 312 All about wheels and tires ................... 315 Changing a wheel ................................ 321 Wheel-tire combination ........................ 326

Technical data ................................... 328 Information regarding technical data ... 328 Vehicle electronics .............................. 328 Identification plates ............................. 329 Service products and filling capaci- ties ...................................................... 330 Vehicle data ......................................... 335

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 160 12 V socket

see Sockets 360 camera

Cleaning ......................................... 284 Function/notes ............................. 171

A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 204 Function/notes ................................ 62 Warning lamp ................................. 234

Accident Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57

Activating media mode General notes ................................ 251

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 113 Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus

With spotlight function ................... 179 Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 199 Display message ............................ 221 Function/information .................... 180

Active Body Control (ABC) Display message ............................ 220 Function/notes ............................. 156

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 199 Display message ............................ 221 Function/information .................... 183

Active multicontour seat .................... 95 Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 164 Display message ............................ 221 Exiting a parking space .................. 166 Function/notes ............................. 163

Important safety notes .................. 163 Parking .......................................... 165

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68 Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 66 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 159 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Display message ............................ 215 Function/notes ............................. 106 Switching on/off ........................... 107

Additional speedometer ................... 201 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 333 Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 243

Air bags Deployment ..................................... 53 Display message ............................ 213 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 47 Important safety notes .................... 46 Introduction ..................................... 46 Knee bag .......................................... 48 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 42 Side impact air bag .......................... 48 Window curtain air bag .................... 49

Air vents Glove box ....................................... 119 Important safety notes .................. 118 Rear ............................................... 119 Setting ........................................... 118 Setting the center air vents ........... 119 Setting the side air vents ............... 119 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 97

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ............................. 158

AIRSCARF Switching on/off .............................. 97

Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71

4 Index

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 71 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 71

Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 255

Ashtray ............................................... 259 Assistance display (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 197 Assistance menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 197 ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 279 Hiding a service message .............. 279 Resetting the service interval dis- play ................................................ 279 Service message ............................ 278 Special service requirements ......... 279

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 71 Function ........................................... 71 Switching off the alarm .................... 71

ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 199 Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ............................. 175

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights Display message ............................ 215 see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 280 Automatic engine start (ECOstart/ stop function) .................................... 125 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 125 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 104 Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 131 Automatic drive program ............... 132

Changing gear ............................... 131 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 128 Display message ............................ 227 Drive program display .................... 129 Driving tips .................................... 131 Emergency running mode .............. 135 Engaging drive position .................. 129 Engaging neutral ............................ 129 Engaging park position automati- cally ............................................... 128 Engaging reverse gear ................... 128 Engaging the park position ............ 128 Kickdown ....................................... 131 Manual drive program .................... 132 Manual drive program (Mercedes- AMG vehicles) ................................ 133 Oil temperature (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202 Overview ........................................ 128 Problem (malfunction) ................... 135 Program selector button ................ 131 Pulling away ................................... 124 Starting the engine ........................ 123 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 132 Transmission position display ........ 129 Transmission positions .................. 130

Automatic transmission emer- gency mode ....................................... 135 AUX (audio)

Notes/socket ................................ 252

B Back button ....................................... 243 Backup lamp

Display message ............................ 215 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 62 BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with Cross- Traffic Assist)

Important safety notes .................... 63 Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 75 Important safety notes .................... 75 Replacing ......................................... 75

Index 5

Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 294 Display message ............................ 217 Important safety notes .................. 292 Jump starting ................................. 295

Belt see Seat belts

Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blootooth Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 251

Bluetooth Searching for a mobile phone ........ 250 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242 Telephony ...................................... 250

Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Display message ............................ 209 Notes ............................................. 333

Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Brakes ABS .................................................. 62 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 BAS .................................................. 62 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 62 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 333 Display message ............................ 204 EBD .................................................. 68 High-performance brake system .... 144 Hill start assist ............................... 124 HOLD function ............................... 154 Important safety notes .................. 142 Maintenance .................................. 143 Parking brake ................................ 139 Riding tips ...................................... 142 Warning lamp ................................. 233

Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 288 see Flat tire see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 187

C California

Important notice for retail cus- tomers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunction see Display messages

Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system ........................ 247

Calling up the climate control menu

Multimedia system ........................ 247 Camera

see Rear view camera Car

see Vehicle Care

360 camera ................................. 284 Car wash ........................................ 280 Carpets .......................................... 287 Display ........................................... 285 Exhaust pipe .................................. 284 Exterior lights ................................ 283 General notes ................................ 280 Interior ........................................... 285 Matte finish ................................... 282 Night View Assist Plus ................... 285 Paint .............................................. 282 Plastic trim .................................... 285 Power washer ................................ 281 Rear view camera .......................... 284 Roof lining ...................................... 287 Seat belt ........................................ 286 Seat cover ..................................... 286 Selector lever ................................ 286 Sensors ......................................... 284 Steering wheel ............................... 286 Trim pieces .................................... 286 Washing by hand ........................... 281 Wheels ........................................... 282 Windows ........................................ 283 Wiper blades .................................. 283 Wooden trim .................................. 286

6 Index

CD see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 194 Center console

Overview .......................................... 37 Stowage space .............................. 254

Center console in the rear com- partment

Stowage compartment .................. 255 Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72 Changing the media source ............. 194 Child

Restraint system .............................. 58 Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 61 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 59 On the front-passenger seat ............ 60 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60 Top Tether ....................................... 60

Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 57

Cigarette lighter ................................ 259 Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 283 Climate control

Adjusting the footwell tempera- ture (multimedia system) ............... 248 Automatic climate control ............. 112 Controlling automatically ............... 114 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 113 Cooling with air dehumidification (multimedia system) ...................... 248 Defrosting the windows ................. 115 Defrosting the windshield .............. 115 ECO start/stop function ................ 112 General notes ................................ 111 Indicator lamp ................................ 113 Ionization ....................................... 118 Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 247 Notes on using the automatic cli- mate control .................................. 112 Overview ........................................ 246 Overview of systems ...................... 111 Perfume atomizer .......................... 117

Perfume atomizer (multimedia system) .......................................... 247 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 116 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 113 Refrigerant ..................................... 334 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 335 Setting the air distribution ............. 114 Setting the air vents ...................... 118 Setting the airflow ......................... 115 Setting the climate mode ............... 114 Setting the climate mode (multi- media system) ............................... 247 Setting the temperature ................ 114 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 116 Switching on/off ........................... 113 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 116 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 116 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 115 Synchronization function (multi- media system) ............................... 248

Climate control settings Multimedia system ........................ 246

Climate control system Climate control .............................. 112

Cockpit Overview .......................................... 33

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 198 Display message ............................ 209 Operation/notes .............................. 64

COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 285

Combination switch .......................... 105 Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 191 Controller ........................................... 243 Convenience closing feature .............. 87 Convenience opening feature ............ 86

Index 7

Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 277 Display message ............................ 216 Filling capacity ............................... 334 Important safety notes .................. 333 Temperature gauge ........................ 187 Warning lamp ................................. 237

Coolbox .............................................. 260 Cooling

see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 32 Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 215 Function/notes ............................. 106

Crosswind Assist ................................. 68 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 156 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with- out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 68 Cruise control

Calling up the speed last stored .... 146 Cruise control lever ....................... 146 Deactivating ................................... 146 Display message ............................ 225 Driving system ............................... 145 Function/notes ............................. 145 General notes ................................ 145 Important safety notes .................. 145 Setting a speed .............................. 146 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 146

Cup holder Center console .............................. 257 Important safety notes .................. 257 Rear compartment ......................... 257

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 29 Customer Relations Department ....... 29

D Data

see Technical data Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 194 Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 215 Function/notes ............................. 104

Switching on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 201

Declarations of conformity ................. 28 Diagnostics connection ...................... 29 Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 24 Introduction ..................................... 24

Digital speedometer ......................... 191 DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 128 Display

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 278 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 203 Driving systems ............................. 219 Engine ............................................ 216 General notes ................................ 203 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 203 Introduction ................................... 203 Lights ............................................. 215 Safety systems .............................. 204 SmartKey ....................................... 230 Tires ............................................... 226 Vehicle ........................................... 227

Distance recorder see Odometer see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 239 Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 65 DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 148 Activation conditions ..................... 148 Cruise control lever ....................... 148 Deactivating ................................... 152 Display message ............................ 223 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 151 Driving tips .................................... 152 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 149 Function/notes ............................. 147 Important safety notes .................. 147 Setting a speed .............................. 150 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 151 Stopping ........................................ 150

8 Index

with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............................................... 153

Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 79 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 72 Control panel ................................... 39 Display message ............................ 229 Emergency locking ........................... 79 Emergency unlocking ....................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 78 Opening (from inside) ...................... 78 Power closing .................................. 79

Drinking and driving ......................... 141 Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 132 Manual ........................................... 132 Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) ............................................... 133 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 202

Driver's door see Doors

Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 280

Driving Assistance package ............. 180 Driving on flooded roads .................. 144 Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 62 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 64 Distance warning function ............... 65 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) ............................................. 68 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 66 Important safety information ........... 61 Overview .......................................... 61 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 68 STEER CONTROL ............................. 70

Driving systems 360camera .................................. 171 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 180

Active Body Control ABC ............... 156 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 183 Active Parking Assist ..................... 163 AIRMATIC ...................................... 158 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 175 Cruise control ................................ 145 Display message ............................ 219 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 147 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 153 Driving Assistance package ........... 180 HOLD function ............................... 154 Night View Assist Plus ................... 177 PARKTRONIC ................................. 160 Rear view camera .......................... 167 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 176

Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 144 Automatic transmission ................. 131 Brakes ........................................... 142 Break-in period .............................. 120 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 152 Downhill gradient ........................... 142 Drinking and driving ....................... 141 Driving in winter ............................. 144 Driving on flooded roads ................ 144 Driving on wet roads ...................... 144 Exhaust check ............................... 141 Fuel ................................................ 141 General .......................................... 140 Hydroplaning ................................. 144 Icy road surfaces ........................... 144 Important safety notes .................. 120 Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads ....................................... 143 Snow chains .................................. 305 Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 142 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 120 Wet road surface ........................... 143

DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 195 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

E EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ................................ 99

Index 9

EASY-ENTRY system ............................ 95 EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 100 Function/notes ................................ 99

EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)

Display message ............................ 206 Function/notes ................................ 68

ECO display Function/notes ............................. 141 On-board computer ....................... 190

ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 125 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 125 Deactivating/activating ................. 126 General information ....................... 125 Important safety notes .................. 124 Introduction ................................... 124

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- tion System)

Emergency Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57

Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 79 Trunk ............................................... 84 Vehicle ............................................. 79

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 53

Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 26

Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 237 Display message ............................ 216 ECO start/stop function ................ 124 Engine number ............................... 330 Irregular running ............................ 127 Jump-starting ................................. 295 Starting (important safety notes) ... 122 Starting problems .......................... 127 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 123 Starting via smartphone ................ 123 Starting with the Start/Stop but- ton ................................................. 123

Switching off .................................. 138 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 300

Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 127

Engine oil Adding ........................................... 276 Additives ........................................ 333 Checking the oil level ..................... 275 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 275 Checking the oil level using the on-board computer ........................ 275 Display message ............................ 218 Filling capacity ............................... 333 General notes ................................ 332 Notes about oil grades ................... 332 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 275 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 202

Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 202 Characteristics ................................. 67 Deactivating/activating ................. 197 Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 67 Display message ............................ 204 Function/notes ................................ 66 General notes .................................. 66 Important safety information ........... 67 Warning lamp ................................. 234

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ...................................................... 66 Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 141 Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 284 Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 283 Setting options .............................. 104 see Lights

Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 100 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 101

10 Index

Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 101 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 101 Setting ........................................... 101 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 103 Storing the parking position .......... 102

External audio source Connecting .................................... 252

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 254

F Favorites

Overview ........................................ 246 Features ............................................. 257 Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 330 Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 321 MOExtended tires .......................... 289 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 288 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 289

Floormats ........................................... 271 Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 328 Two-way radio ................................ 328

Fuel Additives ........................................ 332 Consumption statistics .................. 191 Displaying the current consump- tion ................................................ 190 Displaying the range ...................... 190 Driving tips .................................... 141 Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 331 Important safety notes .................. 331 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137 Refueling ........................................ 135 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 331

Fuel filler flap Closing ........................................... 137

Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 190

Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 331 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137

Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 301 Before changing ............................. 301 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 301 Fuse box in the engine compart- ment .............................................. 302 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 301 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 302 Important safety notes .................. 301

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 271 General notes ................................ 268 Important safety notes .................. 269 Opening/closing the garage door .. 271 Problems when programming ........ 270 Programming (button in the rear- view mirror) ................................... 269 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 270

Gasoline ............................................. 331 Gear indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 202 Genuine parts ...................................... 25 Glove box ........................................... 254 Google Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

H Handbrake

see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 82 Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function on/off ............................................ 245 Touchpad ....................................... 245

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 106 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 97 Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 93 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 94 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 94

Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 200

Index 11

Displays and operating .................. 189 Function/notes ............................. 188 Important safety notes .................. 188 Selecting displays .......................... 200 Setting the position ....................... 200 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 103

Headlamps Fogging up ..................................... 107 see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 105 High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 106 Display message ............................ 215 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Hill start assist .................................. 124 HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 155 Activation conditions ..................... 155 Deactivating ................................... 155 Display message ............................ 223 Function/notes ............................. 154 General notes ................................ 154

Home address see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Hood Closing ........................................... 274 Display message ............................ 229 Important safety notes .................. 273 Opening ......................................... 273

Horn ...................................................... 33 HUD

see Head-up display Hydroplaning ..................................... 144

I Ignition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 71 Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 239

Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators see Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 274 Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 34 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 186 Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 108 Control ........................................... 108 Manual control ............................... 108 Overview ........................................ 108 Reading lamp ................................. 108

iPod see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

J Jack

Using ............................................. 323 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 295

K Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 121 Start/Stop button .......................... 121

KEYLESS-GO Activating ......................................... 73 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Deactivation ..................................... 73 Locking ............................................ 73 Start function ................................... 74 Unlocking ......................................... 73

Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 131

Knee bag .............................................. 48

L Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 59 License plate lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 215

12 Index

Light sensor (display message) ....... 215 Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 106 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 104 Cornering light function ................. 106 Fogged up headlamps .................... 107 General notes ................................ 104 Hazard warning lamps ................... 106 High beam flasher .......................... 105 High-beam headlamps ................... 105 Light switch ................................... 104 Low-beam headlamps .................... 105 Parking lamps ................................ 105 Rear fog lamp ................................ 105 Setting exterior lighting ................. 104 Standing lamps .............................. 105 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 201 Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 201 Turn signals ................................... 105 see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 253 Locking

see Central locking Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 79 Emergency locking ........................... 79 From inside (central locking but- ton) .................................................. 78

Locking centrally see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 215 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port .................................................. 95

M M+S tires ............................................ 305 Magic Body Control ........................... 156 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 90 Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 282

MBC see Magic Body Control

mbrace Call priority .................................... 265 Display message ............................ 209 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 265 Downloading routes ....................... 268 Emergency call .............................. 262 General notes ................................ 261 Geo fencing ................................... 268 Info call button .............................. 264 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 267 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 267 Remote vehicle locking .................. 266 Roadside Assistance button .......... 263 Search & Send ............................... 265 Self-test ......................................... 262 Speed alert .................................... 268 System .......................................... 262 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 266

Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 74 General notes .................................. 74 Inserting .......................................... 74 Locking vehicle ................................ 79 Removing ......................................... 74 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 79

Media Interface USB port in the armrest of the center console ............................... 255 see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 194 Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 102

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360camera .................................. 171 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 62 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 180 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 183 Active Parking Assist ..................... 163 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 175 BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 62 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 62

Index 13

Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 156 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with- out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 68 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 147 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 153 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 66 General notes ................................ 145 MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 156 Night View Assist Plus ................... 177 PARKTRONIC ................................. 160 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 55 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 68 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56 Rear view camera .......................... 167 ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 158 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 176

Message memory (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 203 Messages

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 283

Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth inter- face) .............................................. 250 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 251 Frequencies ................................... 328 Installation ..................................... 328 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195 Transmission output (maximum) .... 328

Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 74 MOExtended tires .............................. 289 Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 326 Mounting a new wheel ................... 325 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 322

Raising the vehicle ......................... 323 Removing a wheel .......................... 325 Securing the vehicle against roll- ing away ........................................ 322

MP3 Operation ....................................... 194 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 188

Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 187 Overview .......................................... 35

Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 243

Music files see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

N Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 191 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. 179 Cleaning ......................................... 285 Display message ............................ 222 Function/notes ............................. 177 Pedestrian and animal recogni- tion ................................................ 178 Problem (malfunction) ................... 180 Switching automatic activation on/off ............................................ 198

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 120

O Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49 Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 52

Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... 46

14 Index

Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57 Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Important safety notes .................... 41 Introduction to the restraint sys- tem .................................................. 41 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 42 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 61 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 55 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 42 Seat belt .......................................... 42

OCS Conditions ....................................... 49 Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 52

Odometer ........................................... 190 Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 202 Assistance graphic menu ............... 197 Assistance menu ........................... 197 Display messages .......................... 203 Displaying a service message ........ 279 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 151 Factory settings ............................. 202 Head-up display ............................. 188 Important safety notes .................. 186 Instrument cluster menu ............... 201 Lights menu ................................... 201 Media menu ................................... 194 Menu overview .............................. 189 Message memory .......................... 203 Navigation menu ............................ 191 Operation ....................................... 187 Radio menu ................................... 193 Service menu ................................. 197 Settings menu ............................... 197 Standard display ............................ 190 Telephone menu ............................ 195

Trip menu ...................................... 190 Video DVD operation ..................... 195

Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 28 Important safety notes .................... 28

Operating system see On-board computer

Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 24

Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 26 Vehicle equipment ........................... 26

Outside temperature display ........... 186 Overhead control panel ...................... 38

P Paint code number ............................ 329 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 282 Panic alarm .......................................... 41 Panorama roof ..................................... 88 Parcel net hooks ............................... 256 Parking

Important safety notes .................. 137 Parking brake ................................ 139 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side ................................................ 102 Rear view camera .......................... 167 Switching off the engine ................ 138 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid see 360 camera see Active Parking Assist see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera

Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 139 Applying or releasing manually ...... 139 Display message ............................ 206 Electric parking brake .................... 139 Emergency braking ........................ 140 General notes ................................ 139 Releasing automatically ................. 140 Warning lamp ................................. 236

Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 105

Index 15

PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 162 Driving system ............................... 160 Function/notes ............................. 160 Important safety notes .................. 160 Problem (malfunction) ................... 163 Range of the sensors ..................... 161 Warning display ............................. 162

PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 213 Indicator lamps ................................ 42 Problem (malfunction) ................... 213

Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 117 Problem (malfunction) ................... 118 Setting the perfume intensity (multimedia system) ...................... 247 Vial ................................................ 117

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 61 Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 285 Power locks ......................................... 79 Power washers .................................. 281 Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message ............................ 210 Operation ......................................... 55

PRE-SAFE Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 199 Display message ............................ 210 Function/notes ................................ 68 Important safety notes .................... 69 Warning lamp ................................. 239

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 210 Operation ......................................... 56

Program selector button .................. 131 Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71 Immobilizer ...................................... 71

Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 25

Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 124 General notes ................................ 124 Hill start assist ............................... 124

Q QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 30

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29 Quick access for telephone

Sending DTMF tones ...................... 245

R Radiator cover ................................... 274 Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 193 Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Radio-wave reception/transmis- sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28 Reading lamp ..................................... 108 Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 119 Stowage compartment .................. 255

Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 215 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Rear seats Overview .......................................... 40

Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 284 Displays in the COMAND display ... 168 Function/notes ............................. 167

Rear window blind ............................ 258 Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 116 Switching on/off ........................... 116

Rear-view mirror Dipping (automatic) ....................... 101

16 Index

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem)

Important safety notes .................. 334 Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Important safety notes .................. 135 see Fuel

Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 268 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 269

Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 108

Reporting safety defects .................... 29 Rescue card ......................................... 30 Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 218 Warning lamp ................................. 237

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 116 Restraint system

Display message ............................ 211 Introduction ..................................... 41 Warning lamp ................................. 236 Warning lamp (function) ................... 42

Reversing feature Roller sunblind ................................. 88 Side windows ................................... 85 Trunk lid ........................................... 80

ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 158 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27 Roller sunblind

Panorama roof ................................. 88 Rear window .................................. 258

Roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Opening and closing ........................ 89 Operating ......................................... 88 Resetting ......................................... 89

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 287 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 335 Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

S Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 see Occupant safety see Operating safety

Safety system see Driving safety systems

SD card Inserting/removing ........................ 251

SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242 Selecting ........................................ 194

Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Seat Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat ............... 93

Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and front- passenger seat belt ......................... 46 Cleaning ......................................... 286 Correct usage .................................. 44 Fastening ......................................... 44 Important safety guidelines ............. 43 Introduction ..................................... 42 Releasing ......................................... 45 Warning lamp ................................. 232 Warning lamp (function) ................... 46

Seating Seating comfort package ................. 95

Seating comfort package ................... 95 Seats

Active multicontour seat .................. 95 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 92 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port .................................................. 95 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 93 Calling up a stored setting (mem- ory function) .................................. 103 Cleaning the cover ......................... 286 Correct driver's seat position ........... 91 EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............... 99 Folding the backrests forward/ back ................................................. 95 Important safety notes .................... 91

Index 17

Seat backrest display message ..... 229 Seat heating .................................... 96 Seat heating problem ...................... 97 Seat ventilation ................................ 96 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 103 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 97 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 96 Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 96

Section Wheels and tires ............................ 303

Securing a load see Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 256 Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 286 see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 284 Service menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 197 Service message

see ASSYST PLUS Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 333 Coolant (engine) ............................ 333 Engine oil ....................................... 332 Fuel ................................................ 331 Important safety notes .................. 330 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem) ............................................... 334 Washer fluid ................................... 334

Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 202 On-board computer ....................... 197

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 202 Side impact air bag ............................. 48 Side marker lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 215

Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 283 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 86 Important safety information ........... 85 Opening/closing .............................. 86 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88 Resetting ......................................... 87 Reversing feature ............................. 85

SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 75 Changing the programming ............. 74 Checking the battery ....................... 75 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 86 Display message ............................ 230 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72 Important safety notes .................... 72 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 74 Loss ................................................. 76 Mechanical key ................................ 74 Overview .......................................... 72 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 121 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76 Starting the engine ........................ 123

Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 123

SMS see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Snow chains ...................................... 305 Sockets

Center console .............................. 260 General notes ................................ 260 Rear compartment ......................... 260 Trunk ............................................. 260

Sound Switching on/off ........................... 243

Special seat belt retractor .................. 57 Specialist workshop ............................ 29 Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi- tional speedometer ........................ 201

18 Index

Digital ............................................ 191 In the Instrument cluster ................. 34 Segments ...................................... 186 Selecting the display unit ............... 201

Standing lamps Display message ............................ 215 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Start/Stop button General notes ................................ 121 Key positions ................................. 122 Removing ....................................... 122 Starting the engine ........................ 123

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 122 STEER CONTROL .................................. 70 Steering

Display message ............................ 229 Warning lamps ............................... 241

Steering Assist see DISTRONIC PLUS

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 225 Steering assistant STEER CON- TROL

see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 187 Cleaning ......................................... 286 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............... 99 Important safety notes .................... 98 Paddle shifters ............................... 132 Steering wheel heating .................... 98 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 103

Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 Switching on/off .............................. 98

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 132 Stop&Go Pilot

see DISTRONIC PLUS Stowage areas ................................... 253 Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 255 Center console .............................. 254

Center console in rear compart- ment .............................................. 255 Cup holders ................................... 257 Door ............................................... 255 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 254 Glove box ....................................... 254 Important safety information ......... 253 Rear ............................................... 255 Rear seat backrest ......................... 255 Stowage net ................................... 256 see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 256 Stowage space

Parcel net retainers ....................... 256 Securing a load .............................. 256

Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... 256 Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 305 Sun visor ............................................ 258 Suspension mode

Active Body Control ABC ............... 157 Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 159 Suspension settings

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 202 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 116 Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 251

T Tachometer ........................................ 186 Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 215 Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 330 Information .................................... 328 Tires/wheels ................................. 326 Vehicle data ................................... 335

Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 196 Authorizing a mobile phone (con- necting) ......................................... 250

Index 19

Connecting a mobile phone (gen- eral information) ............................ 250 Display message ............................ 230 Introduction ................................... 195 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195 Number from the phone book ........ 196 Redialing ........................................ 196 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 196 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242 Switching between mobile phones ........................................... 251

Temperature Coolant .......................................... 187 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 202 Outside temperature ...................... 186 Setting (climate control) ................ 114 Transmission oil (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202

Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 309 Checking manually ........................ 309 Display message ............................ 226 Maximum ....................................... 308 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 291 Notes ............................................. 307 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 291 Recommended ............................... 306 Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 290

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure elec- tronically ........................................ 310 Function/notes ............................. 309 General notes ................................ 309 Important safety notes .................. 309 Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 312 Restarting ...................................... 311 Warning lamp ................................. 240 Warning message .......................... 311

TIREFIT kit Important safety notes .................. 289 Storage location ............................ 288 Tire pressure not reached .............. 291 Tire pressure reached .................... 291 Using ............................................. 290

Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 320 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 319 Bar (definition) ............................... 319 Changing a wheel .......................... 321 Characteristics .............................. 319 Checking ........................................ 303 Curb weight (definition) ................. 320 Definition of terms ......................... 319 Direction of rotation ...................... 322 Display message ............................ 226 Distribution of the vehicle occu- pants (definition) ............................ 321 DOT (Department of Transporta- tion) (definition) ............................. 319 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 319 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... 320 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- inition) ........................................... 320 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) (definition) .............................. 320 Important safety notes .................. 303 Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 320 Information on driving .................... 303 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 320 Labeling (overview) ........................ 316 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 321 Load index ..................................... 318 Load index (definition) ................... 320 Maximum load on a tire (defini- tion) ............................................... 320 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 320 Maximum permissible tire pres- sure (definition) ............................. 320 Maximum tire load ......................... 318 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 320 MOExtended tires .......................... 304 Optional equipment weight (defi- nition) ............................................ 321 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- inition) ........................................... 320 Replacing ....................................... 321 Service life ..................................... 304

20 Index

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 321 Snow chains .................................. 305 Speed rating (definition) ................ 320 Storing ........................................... 322 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 319 Summer tires in winter .................. 305 Temperature .................................. 316 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 321 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 321 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 321 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 320 Tire size (data) ............................... 326 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 316 Tire tread ....................................... 304 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 321 Total load limit (definition) ............. 321 Traction ......................................... 315 Traction (definition) ....................... 321 Tread wear ..................................... 315 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 315 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 319 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 321 Wheel and tire combination ........... 326 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 320 see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 60 Touchpad

Changing the station/music track .............................................. 245 Character suggestions ................... 244 Deleting characters ....................... 245 Entering a space ............................ 245 Entering characters ....................... 244 Gesture control .............................. 244 Handwriting recognition ................ 245 Operating the touchpad ................. 244 Overview ........................................ 244 Quick access for Audio .................. 245 Quick access for telephone ........... 245 Switching ....................................... 244 Switching input line ....................... 245

Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 300

Important safety notes .................. 298 Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 298 Installing the towing eye ................ 299 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 300 Removing the towing eye ............... 299 Transporting the vehicle ................ 300 With both axles on the ground ....... 299

Towing eye ......................................... 288 Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Traffic Sign Assist Activating ....................................... 176 Display message ............................ 223 Function/notes ............................. 176 Important safety notes .................. 176 Instrument cluster display ............. 177 Switching on/off ........................... 198

Transfer case ..................................... 135 Transmission

see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 300 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 286 Trip computer (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 191 Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 190 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 191

Trunk Emergency release .......................... 84 Emergency release button ............... 85 Important safety notes .................... 80 Locking separately ........................... 84 Opening ........................................... 81 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 83 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 81 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 82 Power closing .................................. 79

Trunk lid Display message ............................ 229 Obstacle recognition ........................ 80 Opening dimensions ...................... 335

Index 21

Opening/closing .............................. 80 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 335 Turn signals

Display message ............................ 215 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 328 Installation ..................................... 328 Transmission output (maximum) .... 328 Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 272

Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate

U Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 79 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 78

Upshift indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 202 USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter- face ............................................... 251

V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 258 Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29 Data acquisition ............................... 30 Display message ............................ 227 Equipment ....................................... 26 Individual settings .......................... 197 Limited Warranty ............................. 30 Loading .......................................... 312 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 79 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 72 Lowering ........................................ 326 Maintenance .................................... 27 Operating safety .............................. 28 Parking .......................................... 137 Parking for a long period ................ 140 Pulling away ................................... 124 Raising ........................................... 323 Reporting problems ......................... 29 Securing from rolling away ............ 322 Towing away .................................. 298

Transporting .................................. 300 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 79 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 72 Vehicle data ................................... 335

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 335 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 79 Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 329 Vehicle level

Active Body Control ABC ............... 156 AIRMATIC ...................................... 158 Display message ............................ 219

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 288 Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 195 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Video-AUX Connecting an external video source ............................................ 252

VIN Type plate ...................................... 329

W Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 234 Brakes ........................................... 233 Check Engine ................................. 237 Coolant .......................................... 237 Distance warning ........................... 239 ESP .............................................. 234 ESP OFF ....................................... 236 Fuel tank ........................................ 237 General notes ................................ 231 Overview .......................................... 34 Parking brake ................................ 236 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 42 Reserve fuel ................................... 237 Restraint system ............................ 236 Seat belt ........................................ 232 Steering ......................................... 241 Tire pressure monitor .................... 240

Warranty .............................................. 26 Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 230

22 Index

Weather display (COMAND) see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 242

Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 326

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 326 Wheel chock ...................................... 322 Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 321 Checking ........................................ 303 Cleaning ......................................... 282 Important safety notes .................. 303 Information on driving .................... 303 Interchanging/changing ................ 321 Mounting a new wheel ................... 325 Mounting a wheel .......................... 322 Removing a wheel .......................... 325 Snow chains .................................. 305 Storing ........................................... 322 Tightening torque ........................... 326 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 326

Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 212 Operation ......................................... 49

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 115 Infrared reflective .......................... 272

Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 278 Important safety notes .................. 334 Notes ............................................. 334

Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 110 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 109 Switching on/off ........................... 108

Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 305 Slippery road surfaces ................... 144 Snow chains .................................. 305

Winter operation Radiator cover ............................... 274 Summer tires ................................. 305

Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 305

Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 283 Important safety notes .................. 109 Replacing ....................................... 109

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 286 Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 23

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor- mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre- hensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys- tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man- ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi- cle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. Further information can be found in the Digital Oper- ator's Manual in the "COMAND" section under the "Character entry (telephony)" key- word. RContents You can select individual sections in the con- tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- ual X Press the button on the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man- ual

General notes Please observe the information about the oper- ation of the controller (Y page 243).

Content pages The content pages can be accessed bymeans of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents.

X To scroll forward/backward: turn3 the controller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information text or save book- marks: slide9 the controller to the right;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controller downwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the% symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the$,%, or button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper- ator's Manual remains open in the back- ground.

24 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

General notes

H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- tion.

Environmental concerns and recom- mendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen- tal rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajor assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio sys- tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved byMercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 25

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehi- cle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been spe- cifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro- vide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 329).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publica- tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe- cific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety- relevant systems and functions. The equip- ment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustra- tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys- tems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- let are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and condi- tions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System War- ranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace- ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor- nia Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reason- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre- sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

26 Service and vehicle operation In tr od uc tio

n

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you when taking the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service advisor will enter every service into your Main- tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100(Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own- ership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact- ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter- ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: RService facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. RThe fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Deliv- ery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 27

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/mainte- nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under- body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unex- pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, com- bustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour- ney you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity forwireless vehicle components USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

28 Operating safety In tr od uc tio

n

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affec- ted. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspec- tion.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel- evant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifica- tions Rwork on electronic components

Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- ers could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- isfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec- essary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects USA only:

Operating safety 29

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contra- ventions against these instructions is not cov- ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res- cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information docu- ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy- ment, intervention of stability control sys- tems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc- tions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimize vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- mation can be read from the event datamemory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- vice network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- mation is obtained from it, if required.

30 Data stored in the vehicle In tr od uc tio

n

After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- mation is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are con- ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- tion with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been con- tractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- cle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emer- gency.

COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- uations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- tem. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Owners Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- tions.

Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened

RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and RHow fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa- tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data rou- tinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce- ment, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforce- ment; by federal, state or local government; in connectionwith or arising out of litigation involv- ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter- ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Data stored in the vehicle 31

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

Information on copyright

General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following web- site: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

32 Information on copyright In tr od uc tio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift- ers 132

; Combination switch 105

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 34

A DIRECT SELECT lever 128

B Overhead control panel 38

C Control panel for: Lowering the rear seat head restraints 94 u Extending/retracting the rear window roller sun- blind 258 Moves the seat-belt extender forwards 44 PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- tor lamps 42 Adjusting the brightness of the instrument lighting and the multimedia system dis- play

D Climate control systems 111

Function Page

E Ignition lock 121 Start/Stop button 121

F Adjusts the steering wheel 98 Steering wheel heating 98

G Cruise control lever 146

H Electric parking brake 139

I Diagnostics connection 29

J Opens the hood 273

K Light switch 104

L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot 153 Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist 183 Deactivating PARKTRONIC 160 Switching on the 360 cam- era 171 Activating Night View Assist 177 Switching on the head-up display 188

Cockpit 33

At a gl an ce

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Speedometer Warning and indicator lamps: ! ABS 234 ESP OFF 234 ESP 234 Seat belt 232 6 Restraint system 42

; Multifunction display 188 Outside temperature display 186 Warning and indicator lamps: # Turn signal, left 105 L Low-beam headlamps 105 K High-beam headlamps 105 R Rear fog lamp 105 T Parking lamps, license plate lamps and instrument cluster lighting 105 ! Turn signal, right 105

= Tachometer 186 Warning and indicator lamps:

Function Page Distance warning 239 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 236 Electric parking brake (red) 236 F USA only ! Canada only ; Check Engine 237 Power steering 241 Brakes (red) 233 $ USA only J Canada only J Brakes (yellow) 233

? Coolant temperature gauge 187 Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant 237

A Fuel level indicator Warning and indicator lamps: 8 Reserve fuel level with fuel filler flap location indica- tor (right) 237

34 Instrument cluster At

a gl an ce

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Instrument cluster with mul- tifunction display 188

; Sets the brightness of the instrument cluster and the multimedia system display 186

= Multimedia system display

? DVD changer or single DVD drive

A Multimedia system control- ler and buttons

B ~

Rejects or ends a call 195 Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6

Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial mem- ory WX

Adjusts the volume 8

Mute

Switches on the Voice Con- trol System

Function Page

C

Opens the menu list 9:

Selects a menu or submenu or scrolls through lists 187 a

Confirms a selection 187 Hides display messages 203 %

Back 187

Switches off the Voice Con- trol System

Multifunction steering wheel 35

At a gl an ce

i Additional information can be found: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa- rate operating instructions

36 Multifunction steering wheel At

a gl an ce

Center console

Function Page

: Switches the multime- dia system on/off 243

; Adjusts the volume 243

= ECO start/stop func- tion 126

? Touchpad 244 Telephone keypad (see the separate operating instruc- tions)

A Sets the vehicle level 158

B e Adjusts the suspension settings 159

C Selects the drive pro- gram/program selector but- ton 131 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Selects the drive pro- gram/program selector but- ton 131

Function Page

D % Back button 243

E T Seat adjustment but- ton 92

F Navigation button (see Digital Operator's Manual)

G $ Radio button (see Digi- tal Operator's Manual)

H Hazard warning lamps 106

I Media button (see Dig- ital Operator's Manual)

J % Telephone, address book and Internet button; see the Digital Operator's Manual

K Vehicle functions/ system settings button (see Digital Operator's Manual)

L Controller 243

Center console 37

At a gl an ce

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 108

; |Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 108

= G SOS button 262

? c Switches the front inte- rior lighting on/off 108

A u Switches the rear inte- rior lighting on/off 108

B p Switches the right- hand reading lamp on/off 108

C Info call button 264

D Eyeglasses compartment 254

E 3Operates the roller sun- blind for the panorama roof 88

Function Page

F Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL 90 Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: 3Operates the roller sun- blind for the panorama roof 88

G Buttons for the garage door opener 269

H Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the sep- arate operating instructions

I F Breakdown assistance call button 263

38 Overhead control panel At

a gl an ce

Door control panel

Function Page

: s Seat ventilation 96

; c Seat heating 96

= AIRSCARF 97

? w Adjusts the front- passenger seat from the driv- er's seat 93

A r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column 102

B Adjusts the seats electrically 92

C 7Z\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 100

Function Page

D WOpens/closes the right side window 85

E W Opens/closes the rear right side window 85

F p Opens/closes the trunk lid 83

G W Opens/closes the rear left side window 85

H Opens the door 78

I %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 78

J W Opens/closes the left side window 85

Door control panel 39

At a gl an ce

Rear seats

Function Page

: Stowage box in the seat backrest 255 Coolbox 260

; Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 255

Function Page

= Cup holder 257

? Stowage compartment in the center console 255 Socket 260

40 Rear seats At

a gl an ce

Panic alarm

X To arm: press! button: for approx- imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.

X To disarm: press! button: again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces towhich vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: Rseat belt system Rair bags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 44) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 91).

As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 91). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For exam- ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed.When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that par- ticular accident situation are deployed. How- ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53). For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function andmay fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifi- cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 41

Sa fe ty

Z

Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec- onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- nents of the restraint system are in operational readiness. Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: and PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec- onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol- lowing points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the instal- led child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Chil- dren in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classi- fication of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena- bled or deactivated (Y page 49). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts (Y page 42) and "Air bags" (Y page 46). There you can also find infor- mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur- thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

42 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt extender quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- ted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten- sioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Evenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- ting properly.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position.When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an addi- tional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per- form its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro- priate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint

Occupant safety 43

Sa fe ty

Z

system manufacturer's installation and oper- ating instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi- fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 43). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be dis- tributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin- ted or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug- gage or loads (Y page 253).

Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 44).

G WARNING If the seat-belt extender is extended during the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly on the body. The seat belt can then no longer perform its intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

44 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Always make sure that the seat-belt extender is retracted during a journey.

If the seat-belt extender does not retract auto- matically, you can return it manually. Press the seat-belt extender back to the stop before start- ing the vehicle to do so. Returning the seat-belt extender requires force.

The seat-belt extender for the driver and front passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat- belt extender= is extended when the respec- tive door is closed.

You can also extend seat-belt extender= with seat-belt extender button?. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press seat-belt extender button?. Seat-belt extender= extends.

Seat-belt extender= is retracted again if: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within 60 seconds In this case, you can extend seat-belt extender= again. Press seat-belt extender button? again. Rthe respective door is opened

Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it for- wards Rthe front-passenger seat remains unoccupied If you then press seat-belt extender but- ton?, seat-belt extender= will not extend.

Basic illustration X Adjust the seat (Y page 91). The seat backrest must be in an almost ver- tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt extender= and engage belt tongue; into belt buckle:. The seat belt on the drivers seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened auto- matically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 44).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 57).

Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Occupant safety 45

Sa fe ty

Z

X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back.

Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This func- tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle when the seat-belt extender is retracted and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust- ing. You can activate and deactivate the seat-belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys- tem. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas- tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv- er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- tened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- ing is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be rec- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in appli- cable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independ- ently from one another (Y page 53). However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly andmaintain the great- est possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of

46 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. Youmay otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash- board, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 42). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Do not place any objects on the dashboard, e.g. above the front-passenger front air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar.

Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.

G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door pan- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Front air bags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced.

Occupant safety 47

Sa fe ty

Z

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer- ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- tional head and thorax protection for the occu- pants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 42). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 49). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 49) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag; under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- vent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear side impact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol- ster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers addi- tional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

48 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 53).

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat- egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Prerequisite To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica- tion, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- selves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front- passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera- tion (OCS)

Occupant safety 49

Sa fe ty

Z

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul- taneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec- onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bag displaymessage appears in the instrument clus- ter (Y page 213). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey.

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is

disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front- passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.

G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problemswith theOccupant Classification Sys- tem" (Y page 53).

50 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoul- der belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelvemonths old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per- son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57). When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front- passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

Occupant safety 51

Sa fe ty

Z

System self-test

G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front- passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceler- ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- pant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dash- board. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS oper- ation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Prob- lems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53).

52 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 52).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the front- passenger seat is occu- pied by an adult or a per- son of a stature corre- sponding to that of an adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor- rect. X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front- passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: Runoccupied Roccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord- ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom- mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- tection and cannot provide the intended pro-

Occupant safety 53

Sa fe ty

Z

tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- ist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trig- ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- ing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to pre- vent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physi- cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- eration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 42) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independ- ently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- passenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- mines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 42). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec- ond deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten- sioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or

54 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deploy- ment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are activa- ted independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rear compartment seats The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front- passenger seat is occupied

REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer addi- tional protection in this situation RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer addi- tional protection to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independ- ently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- eration and the apparent type of accident: RFrontal collision RSide impact RRollover

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi- cle occupants.

Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be dam- aged when PRE-SAFE is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident can- not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Occupant safety 55

Sa fe ty

Z

Function PRE-SAFE intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi- cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under- steers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor systemdetects an imminent danger of collision in certain sit- uations

PRE-SAFE takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the front side windows are closed. Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rvehicleswith amulticontour seat: the air pres- sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes without result- ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. Informa- tion about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 46).

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction PRE-SAFE PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-

uations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes. PRE-SAFE PLUS does not intervene if the vehi- cle is backing up. When driving, or when parking or exiting a park- ing space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE PLUS will not apply the brakes.

Function PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa- tions if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear- end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is can- celed: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result- ing in an accident, the original settings are restored.

56 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Automatic measures after an acci- dent Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropri- ate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 44). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be

Children in the vehicle 57

Sa fe ty

Z

secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out of the belt outlet.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti- vating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back to the seat-belt extender in the front and the belt outlet in the rear. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces

You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cush- ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, strik- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide- lines" (Y page 253).

G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- tems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

58 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- ing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49). There you will also find information on deactivating the front- passenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the fol- lowing standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor- responds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal- lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- ing system

G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- lation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; on the rear seats are covered by folding upholstered lining= with Velcro fastening. X Fold upholstered lining= upwards. X Turn support: by 90. Upholstered lining= remains folded upwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings;.

After you have removed the LATCH-type (ISO- FIX) child restraint system, you must turn sup- port: on upholstered lining= by 90 again. Then fold upholstery lining= down. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Children in the vehicle 59

Sa fe ty

Z

Top Tether

Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Top Tether anchorages The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move head restraint: upwards (Y page 94).

X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under head restraint: between the two head restraint bars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage=. Make sure that Top Tether beltA is not twis- ted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always comply with the child restraint system manufactur- er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchorage =.

X If necessary, move head restraint: back down again slightly (Y page 94). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct rout- ing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat

General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front- passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- passenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- board

Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 42) is the front- passenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- tions.

60 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint sys- temmust always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat-belt extender of the front-passenger seat to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoul- der belt strap must be routed forwards from the retracted seat-belt extender for the front- passenger seat. Always observe the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- tions.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- cle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 62) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 62) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 64) RESP (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 66) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 68) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 68) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 70)

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is ade- quate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- tion regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 303). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

Driving safety systems 61

Sa fe ty

Z

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehiclewhen braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking charac- teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- ally, further driving safety systems are deac- tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- ding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 234) and dis- play messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 204).

Braking X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Brakes X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 61).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational.

62 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- cle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake sys- tem is still available with complete brake boost- ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 63).

Important safety notes

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo- ple, this is especially the case if they are mov- ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering

As a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distin- guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera sys- tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems 63

Sa fe ty

Z

Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- ardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are recognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- ing force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simulta- neously (Y page 55).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- tion as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- cle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General information COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autono- mous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will bewarned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rthe vehicle is new or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS sys- tem Observe the notes in the section on breaking- in (Y page 120).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active after switching on the igni- tion.

64 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com- puter (Y page 198). When deactivated, the dis- tance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- ded period of time. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- ped or parked vehicles.

Important safety notes G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.

X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning.

Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warn- ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph (105 km/h) for moving objects Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- tion to intervene. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously (Y page 55).

Driving safety systems 65

Sa fe ty

Z

Adaptive Brake Assist

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis- tance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- tance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta- tionary obstacles. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger pro- tection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously (Y page 55). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene

There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

ESP monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- cle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

66 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

ETS traction control is part of ESP. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- red to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ing safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, then ESP is deactivated. If the ESP warning lamp lights up contin- uously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc- tion. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 234) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 204). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is automatically active. If ESP intervenes, the ESPwarning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip.

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP You can deactivate or activate ESP via the on- board computer (Y page 197). ESPdeactivated: The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Driving safety systems 67

Sa fe ty

Z

ESPactivated: The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP. RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter- venes. RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP intervenes. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Crosswind Assist

General information Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: informa- tion on stabilizing the vehicle in the event of crosswind (Y page 156). Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross- wind driving assistance function integrated in ESP noticeably reduces these impairments. ESP intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect- ing your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP is switched off or deactivated because of a mal- function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)

General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 234) as well as display messages (Y page 206).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 154) and hill start assist (Y page 124).

PRE-SAFE Brake

General information PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFEBrake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 61).

PRESAFE Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.

68 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

For PRE-SAFEBrake to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- cle can be detected. PRE-SAFE Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body con- tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 69).

Important safety notes

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake will initially brake your vehi- cle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- ularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot inter- vene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky

Driving safety systems 69

Sa fe ty

Z

Rdarkness Ror if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distin- guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera sys- tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- vate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board com- puter (Y page 199). If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the symbol appears in themultifunction dis- play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are triggered (Y page 55).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until imme- diately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- SAFE Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP is deactivated RESP is malfunctioning Rthe steering is faulty Power steering will, however, continue to func- tion.

70 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

Protection against theft

Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- tem is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately ten seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart- Key or KEYLESS-GO.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To stop the alarm with the SmartKey: press the% or& button on the Smart- Key. The alarm is stopped.

or X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped.

or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi- cle. The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys- tem automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available.

Protection against theft 71

Sa fe ty

Z

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the Smart- Key.

VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the trunk lid = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the% button. If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via the

72 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. You will receive visual and acoustic locking con- firmation if all components were able to be locked. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey; see the Digital Operator's Manual.

X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold theF button until the trunk lid opens.

X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca- ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press theF button on the SmartKey. When the trunk lid closes you can then release the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- Key in the vehicle (Y page 123).

Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the han- dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface: or;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience clos- ing feature (Y page 87).

X To open the trunk lid: push in the top of the star on the trunk lid. The trunk lid opens.

Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the& button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 75) of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart- Key.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.

SmartKey 73

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- Key in the vehicle (Y page 123).

Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking sys- tem. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the% and& buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the bat- tery check lamp (Y page 75) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the% button once. X To unlock centrally: press the% button twice.

X To lock: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the% and& buttons simultane- ously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 75) flashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto- matically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechan- ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about: RLocking/unlocking the driver's door (Y page 79) RUnlocking the trunk (Y page 84)

Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch: is back in its basic position.

74 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guide- lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal- ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp: lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 75). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 74).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until bat- tery compartment cover: opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

SmartKey 75

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover: into the housing first and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey (Y page 74).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if necessary (Y page 75).

If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79). X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if necessary (Y page 75).

If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

76 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con- trol function: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79). X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using the Smart- Key.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 294). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 295). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using the Start/ Stop button. The Smart- Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked. X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if necessary (Y page 75).

If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart- Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the mechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 77

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71).

X Pull door handle;. If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up. The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both doors.

X To unlock: press button:. X To lock: press button;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi- cle locks. If the driver's door is open, the door stays unlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The doors can be opened from the inside. If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71).

78 Doors Op

en in g an d cl os in g

If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but- ton for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ- ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- ing. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can activate and deactivate the automatic locking mechanism via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Power closing Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. X To power close a door: push the door into the lock up to the first detent position. Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly push the trunk lid closed. The power closing function pulls the trunk lid closed.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the mechanical key i If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mech- anism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key.

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will go into opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

Doors 79

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71).

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in the multimedia system; see the Digital Opera- tor's Manual. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 335). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 253).

Obstruction detection with reversing feature for the trunk lid Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea- ture: The trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstruction detectionwith a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening or closing, this pro- cedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically. The automatic obstruction detec- tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when open- ing and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not respond: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions in particular. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or Rpress the top of the star on the trunk lid

80 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

Opening the trunk manually

X Press theF button on the SmartKey. or X Push in the top of star: on the trunk lid. The trunk lid opens.

X When the rear view camera is activated: pull on the folded-out star. The trunk lid opens.

Opening/closing automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addi- tion, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil- dren, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.

Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. RPress the top of the star on the trunk lid.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 335).

Opening automatically You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or by pressing the top of the star on the trunk lid. X Press and hold theF button on the Smart- Key until the trunk lid opens.

or X With the trunk lid unlocked, press the top of the star.

Closing automatically You can close the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the closing button in the trunk lid.

Trunk 81

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X Press closing button: on the trunk lid. or X If the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle: press theF button on the SmartKey. You can release the button as soon as the trunk lid starts to close.

X To stop the closing process: RPress theF button on the SmartKey. RPress the top of the star on the trunk lid. RPress closing button: or locking but- ton; on the trunk lid. RPress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick into the sensor detection range under the bumper with your foot. i If theF button on the SmartKey is pressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initiated after the closing process is stopped, the trunk lid opens.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea- ture and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors are closed, you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The SmartKey must be located to the rear of the vehicle. X Press and release locking button; on the trunk lid. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle locks.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out- side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking move- ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is use- ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kickingmovement under the bumperwith your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per- son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, for example on ice.

82 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sen- sors:. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Other- wise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors: may restrict functionality. RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros- thetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec- tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unintention- ally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the trunk. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations sim- ilar to these. This will prevent unintentional opening or closing of the trunk lid.

Operation

X To open or close: kick into sensor detection range: under the bumper with your foot. A warning tonewill soundwhile the trunk lid is opening or closing.

X If the trunk lid doesnot openor closeafter several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close.

Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure, you have the following options: RKick with your foot in sensor detection range: under the bumper. RPress the closing button on the trunk lid. RPress the top of the star on the trunk lid. RPress theF button on the SmartKey If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop- ped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open

If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close

Opening/closing automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNING The reversing feature does not respond: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions in particular. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or Rpress the top of the star on the trunk lid

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

Trunk 83

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 335).

Opening and closing

X To open: pull the remote operating switch for trunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press and hold remote operating switch: for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is completely closed.

When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the trunk lid from the driver's seat.When the vehicle is also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lid from inside.

Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened.

X To activate: close the trunk lid. X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked. i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 254).

X To deactivate: open the glove box. X Push the switch to position:. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk using the mechanical key

General notes Use the mechanical key if the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 335).

84 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Unlocking

X Push in the top of star: on the trunk lid. The cover folds open

X Insert the mechanical key with the grip facing upwards into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1 clockwise as far as it will go to position2. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

Unlocking the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside using emergency release button:. X Press emergency release button: briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked using emergency release button: when stationary or when the vehicle is in motion. Emergency release button: does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged.

Emergency release button: flashes: Rfor 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Rfor 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side win- dow and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side win- dow during the opening procedure. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the upward movement of one of the front side windows during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During themanual closing process, the sidewin- dows in the doors or in the rear open automat- ically after the corresponding button is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsi- bility of paying attention when closing a side window.

Side windows 85

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win- dows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the front- passenger door. The switches on the driver's door take prece- dence.

: Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor- responding button.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the corre- sponding button.

X To fully close the front side windows: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again.

You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a door. Before opening or closing the side windows, a check is carried out to see whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. The check is carried out if you use the start/stop button instead of a SmartKey in the ignition and you press or pull a button while the engine is switched off. This is carried out by means of a brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey.

Convenience opening

General notes If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi- cle, the convenience opening function is availa- ble. You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience opening X Keep the% button pressed until the side windows are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: release the% button.

86 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- ing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows at the same time. You can then close the roller sunblinds.

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side window (Y page 85) Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 88)

Using the SmartKey X Press and hold the& button until the side windows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows are closed.

X Press and hold the& button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GO The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows are closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama roof closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on the door han- dle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is com- pletely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Side windows 87

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

X Remove the objects. X Close the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea- ture.

Panorama roof

Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or dur- ing opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun- blind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop- ped.

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight.

Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind automatically opens again a little. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- tion when closing the roller sunblind.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react in par- ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing feature

88 Panorama roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sunblind

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the3 switch in direction: or pull it in direction;. The roller sunblind opens.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=. The roller sunblind closes.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is star- ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again.

Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: you can also start and cancel automatic operation using button:. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button:. RIf the roller sunblind is completely closed, it is automatically opened fully. RIf the roller sunblind is not completely closed, it is automatically closed fully. RIf the roller sunblind is in motion, automatic operation is canceled.

Resetting the roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Reset the roller sunblind if it does not operate smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow: until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additional second.

X Make sure that the roller sunblind can be opened fully again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

X If the roller sunblind still does not operate smoothly, please contact a qualified special- ist workshop.

Panorama roof 89

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, the transparency of which can be changed by apply- ing electrical voltage. MAGIC SKYCONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically after a short period when you turn the SmartKey to position 0 or remove the SmartKey.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the headliner behind the panorama roof is damaged or removed, electrical com- ponents will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the headliner behind the panorama roof. RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON- TROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected behind the headliner. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage transformer is stamped with a high-voltage symbol, warning you about the high voltage. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are color orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status it was set to before the engine was switched off.

X To change the degree of transparency: press button:.

At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time.

90 Panorama roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion. Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly. Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of traffic conditions. Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoul- der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects: RAdjusting the seat electrically (Y page 92). RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 98). RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44). RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (Y page 100). RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir- ror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 103).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 57).

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Seats 91

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- ment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- tem.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heat- ing should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passen- gers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materi- als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats whenmov- ing the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats

Adjusting the front seat electrically

: Head restraint height ; Head restraint height = Seat height ? Seat cushion angle

92 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

A Seat cushion length B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment C Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE is triggered, the front- passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi- tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi- tion (Y page 55).

i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 103).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seat settings, certain seat adjustment functions will also adjust other settings.

i The head restraint height is adjusted auto- matically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the drivers seat

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 57).

G WARNING The front-air bags for could also injure the vehicle occupants in the front If the front seats are positioned too close to the dash- board or steering wheel. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far from the front air bags as possible. Also observe the notes on the correct adjustment of the seats.

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the parcel net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

The power supply or the ignition must be switched on so that the front-passenger seat can be selected (Y page 122). X To select the front-passenger seat: press button: repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button: lights up, for the front-passenger seat you can adjust: Radjust the seat (Y page 92) Rseat heating (Y page 96) Rseat ventilation (Y page 96) Rthe memory function to call up or save set- tings (Y page 102).

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident.

Seats 93

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 91).

Adjusting the front head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and hold the release catch:.

X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint is engaged.

Adjusting the front head restraints elec- trically The height of the front head restraints can be adjusted using the seat adjustment switch (Y page 92).

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Lowering from the front electrically

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X Briefly press button:. The head restraints lower.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height mechanically

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height.

X To lower: press release catch: and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.

94 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Folding the front seat backrests forward/back

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold forwards during a braking maneuver or in the event of an accident, for example. The seat backrest will then push the vehicle occupant against the seat belt. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. There is an increased risk of injury. Before each journey,make sure that the back- rest engages fully as described.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 57).

Folding the seat backrest forward The seatmoves forwards as soon as you fold the backrest forwards.

This makes it easier for passengers to get into and out of the rear compartment. The head restraint is lowered and the seat moves for- wards.

X Pull seat release handle: forwards and fold the backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat automatically moves to the foremost position and the head restraint is lowered.

Folding the seat backrest back X Fold back the backrest horizontally until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. The seat moves automatically to the last posi- tion.

Adjusting the active multicontour seat You can adjust the active multicontour seats for the driver and front passenger via the multime- dia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. The driving dynamics settings are only activated if: Rthe seat is occupied Rthe seat belt is fastened

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the 4-way lumbar support via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Seats 95

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high tempera- tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Comfort package: the armrest in the door and the center console can also be heated when you switch on the seat heating of one of the front seats. You can set this via the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. The three red indicator lamps in the button indi- cate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approx- imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. You can set the distribution of the heated sec- tions of the seat cushions and backrests on the front seats using themultimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Front seats

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Rear seats

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Front seats

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the blower setting you have selected.

96 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 86). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat auto- matically switches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Problems with the seat heating/ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating or seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or can- not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually.

AIRSCARF

G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the holes in the head restraints. The three red indicator lamps in the button indi- cate the heating level you have selected.

X Make sure that the power supply or the igni- tion is switched on.

X To activate: press button:. Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To deactivate: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

Make sure that no objects enter the front outlet.

i The blower continues running for seven sec- onds to cool down the heating elements.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off.

Seats 97

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: Adjusts the steering wheel height ; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 99) RStoring settings (Y page 103)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Switch on the ignition (Y page 122). X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc- tion of arrow: or;. Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

98 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heat- ing has switched off pre- maturely or cannot be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by Rthe steering wheel: move the steering wheel adjustment lever. Rthe seat: press the switch for seat adjust- ment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

You can stop the adjustment process by press- ing one of the memory function's position but- tons. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function.

G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- ture, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys- tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature is active The steeringwheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat moves backwards if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith the start/stop button: open the driv- er's door; the ignition must be switched off Rwith the SmartKey:open the driver's door; the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 121)

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards and the driver's seat only moves backwards if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering column has been adjusted.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is storedwith thememory function (Y page 103).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop. The driver's seat only moves backwards if it is not already in the rearmost position.

Steering wheel 99

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat for driving The steering wheel and the driver's seat are moved to the previously set position if: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once

i The steeringwheel and the driver's seat only return to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering column has been adjusted.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is storedwith thememory function (Y page 103).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig- gered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in themultimedia system (see the sep- arate Operator's Manual).

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the dis- tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- dent. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button;. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but- ton=. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button: as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press button: up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mir- ror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-

100 Mirrors Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

dow defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X Briefly press:. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte- rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or com- pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you activate the Automatic Mirror Folding in the multimedia system. X Switch on the power supply or the ignition (Y page 122).

X Press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically When the Automatic Mirror Folding func- tion is activated in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Press and hold button: until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (Y page 101). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 100).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen- sor in the rear-view mirror

Mirrors 101

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir- ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.

Storing using reverse gear

: Memory button M ; Button for the exterior mirror setting = Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror X Start the engine. X Press button=. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default parking position.

X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another posi- tion, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position after approximately 10 seconds.

Saving using the memory button You can store the parking position of the exte- rior mirror on the front-passenger side using

memory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust not be engaged during the process. X Switch on the ignition (Y page 122). X Press button=. X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory button M: and one of the arrows on button; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set- ting X Switch on the ignition (Y page 122). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you use thememory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING When thememory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-

102 Memory function Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

pants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjust- ments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time, even if the power supply is switched off.

Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the backrest in the lumbar region Ractive multicontour seat: side bolsters of the backrest, shoulder of the backrest, contour of the backrest, dynamic function level Rseat heating: distribution of the heated sec- tions of the seat cushion and backrest Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 92). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 98) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 100).

X Pressmemory buttonM and then press one of the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo- nents are in the saved position: RSeat RSteering wheel RExterior mirrors RHead-up Display i If you release the storage position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. Adjustment of the activemulticontour seat or the 4-way lum- bar support is still carried out.

Memory function 103

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Exterior lighting

General notes USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the Daytime Running Lights function via the on-board com- puter (Y page 201).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch (Y page 104) Rthe combination switch (Y page 105) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 201)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting 4 Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light- ing at all times. is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light, but not in the event of poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray. RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock, the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RUSA only: if you have switched on the Daytime Running Lights function via the on- board computer, and the engine is running, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the ambient light. RCanada only: depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the parking and low-beam headlamps are switched on/off automatically when the engine is running.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the position.

USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here, the Daytime Running Lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 201). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the T or L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime run- ning lamps. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

104 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a driving position to P, the daytime running lamps and low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta- tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to theL position, themanual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi- tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position. The green L indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the rear fog lamp.

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L or position.

X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in awell lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- sible, switch on the right-hand X or left- hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on the parking lamps: turn the light switch to the T position. The green T indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove the SmartKey.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand side of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side of the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right

Exterior lighting 105

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

= High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in direc- tion of arrow; or?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in direction of arrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to the L or position.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. In the position, the high-beam head- lamps are switched on onlywhen it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its nor- mal position. The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus: If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactiva- tion of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 106). X High-beam flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch the hazard warning lamps on or off: press button:. The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard warning lamps are switched on. If you now switch on a turn signal lamp using the com- bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

The hazard warning lamps switch on automati- cally if an air bag is deployed. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function The cornering light function improves the illu- mination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visi- bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notes With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between low-beam, partial high-beam and high-beam headlamps. Partial high-beam is a form of illumination whereby the high-beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the high-beam. This prevents glare. When there is a vehicle in front, for example, the high-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left. The vehicle in front is illuminated by the low- beam headlamps. The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer

106 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. If the reflected light from the high-beam head- lamps or partial high-beamheadlamps from traf- fic signs is too strong, the lights are automati- cally dimmed. Glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNING Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus does not react to road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not react to road users who do have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high- beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf- fic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off X To switch on: turn the light switch to the position.

X Press the combination switch forwards beyond the pressure point (Y page 105). The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehi- cle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users are detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. TheK indicator lamp on the instrument cluster also lights up. If other road users are detected, the partial high-beam headlamps are automatically switched on. If you are driving at speeds below approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads are adequately illuminated: The partial high-beam or high-beam head- lamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lampon the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off:move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

Exterior lighting 107

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Left-hand front reading lamp ; | Automatic interior lighting control = c Front interior lighting ? u Rear interior lighting A p Right-hand front reading lamp

Interior lighting control

General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color, brightness, zone and display light for the ambient lighting are set using the multime- dia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. The interior lighting control can be operated using the front overhead control panel.

Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on or off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the over- head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition

lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

Manual interior lighting control X To switch the front interior lighting on or off: press the c button.

X To switch the rear compartment interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamp on or off: press the p button.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the LED light sources of your vehicle yourself. Contact a qualified specialist work- shop which has the necessary specialist knowl- edge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these func- tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- lected on thewindshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi- dues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becom- ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-

108 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

shield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent 4 Continuous wipe, slow 5 Continuous wipe, fast B Single wipe

Wipe with washer fluid X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position.

In the or position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. The washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades; when the screen is wiped with washer fluid , the water is emitted directly from the blades. If you push and hold the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in direction of arrowB, the manual wash program is activa- ted. If you push and hold the combination switch briefly beyond the point of resistance in direc- tion of arrowB, the automatic wash program is activated. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the wind- shield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid dam- age to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi- tion X Switch off the engine. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wiper to the position on the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Windshield wipers 109

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Removing the wiper blades

X To bring the wiper blade into the removal position: hold onto the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow: beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal posi- tion with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob; and pull the wiper blade upwards=.

Installing the wiper blades

X Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow: onto the wiper arm until tab; engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removal posi- tion in the direction of arrow= beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move- ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

110 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Overview of climate control systems

General notes Observe the settings recommended on the fol- lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- tion function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior cli- mate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reac- tivated (Y page 123). The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 116). To enable the air conditioning, pollutant moni- toring and air filtering systems to function cor- rectly, an interior filter must be used at all times. Ensure that the filter is properly installed and that the filter housing in the engine compart-

ment is correctly and tightly sealed by the cover at all times during operation. Use filters that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental condi- tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Book- let.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 86). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired inte- rior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa- ted automatically 60minutes after the Smart- Key has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. In vehi- cles with the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function, the blower can switch on auto- matically after the engine has been switched off and the door opened. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to dry the automatic climate control.

Overview of climate control systems 111

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Automatic climate control panel

Example: automatic climate control panel : Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 114) ; Sets the temperature, left (Y page 114) = Sets the airflow, left (Y page 115) ? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 116) A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 115) B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 247) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 116) D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 113)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 116) E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 115) F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 114) G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 114)

Optimum use of automatic climate control

Climate control system Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- ommendations to help you use climate control optimally. RActivate climate control using the rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated in automatic mode. RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is switched off when the ignition is switched on.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capa- city. If you require the full climate control output,

112 Overview of climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 126).

Operating the climate control sys- tems

Activating/deactivating climate con- trol

General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the rocker switch (Y page 114).

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Toactivate: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theK rocker switch.

X To deactivate: set the airflow to level 0 using theK rocker switch.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi- fication on/off

General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid- ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will

not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- tion.

Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up.

X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. Cooling with air dehumidification can also no longer be activa- ted using the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal- function. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating the climate control systems 113

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes In automaticmode, the set temperature ismain- tained automatically at a constant level. The systemautomatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- tribution. During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated.

Setting climate control to automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch.

X To activate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up.

X To switch to manual operation: press the K rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp on the rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changedmanually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When themanually set function switches back to auto- matic mode, the indicator lamp on the rocker switch lights up again.

Adjusting the climate mode settings In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's and front- passenger areas: FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free setting X To set: set the climate mode using the mul- timedia system (Y page 247).

Setting the temperature

General notes

You can set the temperature separately for the following areas: Rfront footwells, left and right Rdriver and front passenger area

Setting the temperature X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To increase or reduce: press thew rocker switch up or down.

X Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).

Setting the footwell temperature The footwell temperature for the driver and front passenger can be set separately using the mul- timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Man- ual).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air

vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic

114 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Setting the air distribution via the mul- timedia system The air distribution for the left and right sides of the driver's and front-passenger areas can be adjusted using the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Setting the airflow

General notes You can select different airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides.

Setting the airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To increase or reduce: press theK rocker switch up or down.

i You can also set the airflow using the mul- timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Activating or deactivating the syn- chronization function Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The settings for tem- perature, air distribution and airflow on the driv- er's side are adopted for the front-passenger side. X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac- tivate the "Synchronization" function via the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual).

The synchronization function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes You can use this function to defrost the wind- shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To activate: press the rocker switch on the front control panel up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rwindshield heating on Rcooling with air dehumidification on

X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up: activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the rocker switch. The windshield heating is switched on. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly.

Operating the climate control systems 115

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Rear window defroster

General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear window defroster has deactiva- ted prematurely or can- not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter- ing the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- ging up.

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To activate: press theg rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati- cally: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution Rin a tunnel

The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press theg rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati- cally: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 (5 ) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 (5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notes Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front com- partment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

116 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

The heating or ventilation time depends on the temperature that has been set.

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 121).

X To activate:press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be acti- vated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNING If children open the vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficul- ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental note Full vials must not be dis- posed of with household waste. They must be collec- ted separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of full vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a harmful substance collec- tion point.

: Vial lid ; Vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort. Via the multimedia system you can: Rswitch the perfume atomizer on/off Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 247). The following conditions can affect your percep- tion of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control system Rinterior temperature Rtime of year or day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati- gue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operated when the climate control system is switched on and is only active when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil- led vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufactur- ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.

Operating the climate control systems 117

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (Y page 254).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per- fume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach- ieve optimum results from the perfume atom- izer.

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The vehicle interior is not perfumed although the perfume atomizer is acti- vated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will go. X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty. X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Ionization You can use the "Ionization" function to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte- rior. You can switch ionization on or off using the multimedia system (Y page 247). Ionization can only be switched on if the front climate control system is activated. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

118 Setting the air vents Cl im at e co nt ro l

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents Air vents are located: Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash- board Rin the middle of the dashboard Rin the front head restraints Rin the glove box Rin the rear-compartment center console

Example: side air vent : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent = Control for left side air vent X To open/close: press control=. The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise or clock- wise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent; by the middle fin and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjust the rear air vents and the air vent in the glove box; see Digital Operator's Manual.

Setting the air vents 119

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its per- formance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches of the way to the red area of the tachom- eter. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on break- ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the maximum permissible speed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function.

120 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temper- ature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- tionary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! At low engine oil temperatures under 68 (+20 ), the maximum engine speed is limi- ted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine oper- ation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position 3 To start the engine The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notes All vehicles are equipped with a removable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different Smart- Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- ately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the Smart- Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the Smart- Key. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 78), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

Driving 121

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Warning and indicator lamps: see (Y page 231). If Start/Stop button: has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button: once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice. The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if: Ryou do not start the engine within 15 minutes when in this position Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position.

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position

Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignition lock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but- ton from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

122 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

General notes During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 128). The transmission position display in the mul- tifunction display shows P (Y page 129).

You can start the engine in transmission posi- tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 121).

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button

must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func- tion. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 121). The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (Y page 122). You can also start your engine via your smart- phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the jour- ney. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehi- cle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart- phone may be limited to certain countries or regions. You can execute amaximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time. You can only start the engine via your smart- phone if: Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock Rpark position P is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated Rthe panic alarm is not activated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed. Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed

Driving 123

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during ser- vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against uninten- tional starting before carrying out mainte- nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out mainte- nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen the hood

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 79). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con- verter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 140).

Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for- wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in positioni. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

124 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated when- ever you switch on the engine using the Smart- Key or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automati- cally by the ECO start/stop function, the ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis- play. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes- AMG vehicles).

Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission inh ori, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera- ture. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system does not detect any moisture on the windshield when the automatic climate control is switched on

Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con- secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi- ted. All other models: automatic engine switch-off can take place amaximum of four times in a row (initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch- offs).

Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou switch to drive program S or M Rin transmission positionh ori, the brake pedal is released and theHOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse geark Ryou move the transmission out of positionj Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv- er's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- shield when the automatic climate control is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to positionj does not start the engine.

Driving 125

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive programC, press ECO button:.

or X Switch to drive program S orM(Y page 131). Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive program S or M is active, the auto- matic transmission switches to drive program C.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehi- cle stops. If drive program S or M has been selected, the ECO start/stop function is always deactivated.

If you switch on the ECO start/stop function while drive program S is selected, the drive pro- gram automatically switches to C.

All other models

X To deactivate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehi- cle stops. If drive program S or M has been selected, the ECO start/stop function is always deactivated. If you switch on the ECO start/stop function while drive program S is selected, the drive pro- gram automatically switches to E.

126 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to positiong in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 122). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 295). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfir- ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 (120 ).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 277). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 127

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission posi- tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission

position display in the multifunction display (Y page 129).

Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic trans- mission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Rthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- mission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 155) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 150).

Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.

128 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- tion on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 125).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resist- ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis- sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis- sion shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- er's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automat- ically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Using the SmartKey: X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position D X If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro- gram display

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The current transmission position and drive pro- gram appear in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 129

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

: Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program The arrows in the transmission position display showhowand intowhich transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the mul- tifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles The current transmission position and drive pro- gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position ; Drive program The arrows in the transmission position display showhowand intowhich transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the mul- tifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program C or S.

Transmission position and drive pro- gram display

B Park position Only shift the transmission into posi- tion P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 137). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the park- ing lock in order to secure the vehi- cle. If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc- tioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into posi- tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the auto- matic transmission could be dam- aged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.

7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

130 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Driving tips

Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- vidual gears automatically when it is in trans- mission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the auto- matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage- ment restricts switching between transmission positionsD and R to speeds up to amaximum of 5mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance.

Program selector button

X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles): press program selector button: to change the drive program. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press program selector button: repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.

The program selector button influences: Rthe drive program (Y page 132) Rthe engine management On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E is called drive program C. The automatic transmission switches to auto- matic drive program E (drive program C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles). All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

E Economy Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

Automatic transmission 131

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

You can also activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 132). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. Mercedes-AMG vehicles

C Controlled Efficiency

Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Permanent drive programM is only available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. Further information about permanent drive pro- gram M (Y page 133). You can also activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 132). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 132).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

You can activate manual drive programM in the E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic drive programs using steering wheel paddle shift- ers: and; (Y page 132). In manual drive programM, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. Mercedes-AMGvehicles: you can also activate manual drive program M with the program selector button (Y page 133). In manual drive program M, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program E Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes- AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.

Automatic drive program S Drive program S is characterized by the follow- ing: Rsporty engine settings. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD. You can activate manual drive programM in the E (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) and S auto- matic drive programs. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: as well as temporary drive program M, you can also activate perma- nent drive program M. Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 133).

Activating X Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 132). Manual drive program M is temporarily acti- vated.

132 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles:) M and the selected gear appear in the multifunction display.

Shifting gears If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limi- ted amount of time. Depending on which steer- ing wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 132). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If themaximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission auto- matically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission will not shift up to the next gear when the engine speed is very low.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 132). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Automatic down shifting occurs when coast- ing.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The mul- tifunction display shows the recommended gear.

X Shift to recommended gear; according to gearshift recommendation: when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Deactivating If you have activatedmanual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deactiva- ted, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 132).

or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position.

or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 131). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches to the pre- viously activated drive program E (drive pro- gram C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S.

Manual drive program (Mercedes- AMG vehicles)

General information In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust be in position D. Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, respon- siveness and smoothness of gear changes. As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 132).

Switching on the manual drive program Inmanual drive programM, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. You can see the

Automatic transmission 133

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

currently selected drive programandwhich gear is engaged in the multifunction display. X Press the program selector button (Y page 131) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display.

Upshifting ! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine lim- iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi- function display. X When message; appears in the multifunc- tion display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 132). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear if this is permissible.

Maximum acceleration X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the opti- mum gear according to the speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down.

Switching off themanual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 131) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.

134 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission has problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no lon- ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode. 7G-TRONIC: it is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. 9G-TRONIC: it is only partly possible to engage the gears or the trans- mission is in position N. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. 7G-TRONIC: If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear, if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans- mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.

! Since ESP engages automatically, the igni- tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam- aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 135

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu- eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 331).

Refueling

General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 135). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow:. The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

136 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

If you drive at speeds above 2 km/hwith the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel Filler Flap Open message is shown on the multifunction display. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi- cle. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes- sage appears in the multifunction display (Y page 218). In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 237). For further information onwarning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 237).

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.

G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 121). or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 121).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith

hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

Parking 137

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv- etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P.

X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 121). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corre- sponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position 0: "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis- sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis- sion shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- er's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automat- ically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three sec- onds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

138 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to position P.

It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:. When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button

Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle:. The electric parking brake is also engaged auto- matically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta- tionary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary

Parking 139

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

In addition, at least one of the following condi- tions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released automat- ically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe seat belt has been fastened Ryou depress the accelerator pedal If the automatic transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- gency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle: of the electric parking brake (Y page 139). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle: of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer electric parking brake handle: is depressed, the greater the brak- ing force.

During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes- sage appears Rthe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-

140 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- ond.

Drive sensibly save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the rec- ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis- play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter- rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop . Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes- Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how eco- nomical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected set- tings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.

The ECO display consists of three bars: RAccel. RConstant RCoasting

Driving tips 141

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style. The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consump- tion. Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: RLoad RTire pressure RCold start RChoice of route RActive electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO dis- play. The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories: RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro- cesses) - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times) - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid- ance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes) - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep- ing your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccel. and Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving char- acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For

more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset. Show the ECO display (Y page 190).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively. When you take advantage of engine braking, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- ranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive

142 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reac- tion from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- due may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running

Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2- axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-

sult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP system operates automatically. The engine and the ignition must therefore be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP sys- tem operates automatically. The engine and the ignition must therefore be switched off (the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is tested using a brake dynamometer. Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised. Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functional- ity of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 62) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 62). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved byMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/ linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched.

Driving tips 143

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if appli- cable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with light- weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre- sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes The high-performance brake system is only available on Mercedes-AMG vehicles. The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera- ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile- age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspond- ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- planing occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tires have adequate tread depth For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed Ravoid ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth- erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.

144 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con- trol or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 305). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 305). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- tion (Y page 305).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- vative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile- stone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in onewell thought out system for the safety of the vehi- cle occupants and that of other road users.

Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 61).

Cruise control

General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. You can use cruise control if you want to drive at a steady speed for a prolonged period of time. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 145

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed ; Activates or reduces speed = Deactivates cruise control ? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the speedometer, the segments light up from the stored speed to the end of the scale.

Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driv- ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- matically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre- ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre- ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler- ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- trol: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards = .

or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)

146 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Offmessage in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto- matically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec- ted with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- ing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermit- tent warning tone will then sound and the dis- tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the respon- sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- ing, or altering of the device will void any war- ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- tify other road users and complex traffic sit- uations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident.

Driving systems 147

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- cles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi- cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun- tries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi- cles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed ; Activates or reduces speed = Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS ? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed A Sets a specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con- ditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP must be activated, but not intervening at present. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.

148 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift the transmission fromP toD or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?, up: or down;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre- ments (1 km/hincrements):briefly press the cruise control lever up: to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

or X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre- ments (10 km/hincrements):briefly press the cruise control lever up: past the pres- sure point for a higher speed, or down; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes- sage appears in themultifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?, up: or down;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth- erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ- ously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

or X Accelerate briefly. The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the stored speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ- ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in front, the system operates like a cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. In this way, the specified minimum distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed to the set speed.

Selecting the drive program All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG): DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you select the S drive program (Y page 131). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving pro-

Driving systems 149

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traf- fic. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you select the S or M drive program (Y page 131). Accel- eration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. When you select the C drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recom- mended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to the overtaking lane, if: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of a collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmon- itors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles).

Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 152). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to brake and come to a halt. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- tionary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi- cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans- mission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also shift into position P automatically.

Setting a speed X Push the cruise control lever upwards: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre- ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly push the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre- ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly push the cruise control lever up: or down; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed back to the

150 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

last speed stored after you have finished over- taking.

Setting a specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this func- tion, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, depending on the driving speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 151). Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis- tance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec- essary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian- gle; shows the stored speed. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front: and stored speed; light up. The seg- ments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Displays in the assistance graphic

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deac- tivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Driving systems 151

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X To call up the assistance graphic:select the Assistance Graphic function using the on- board computer (Y page 197). You will see the stored speed for about five secondswhen you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- wards:.

or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five sec- onds. The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically securedwith the elec- tric parking brake RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage will be displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The dis- tance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis- takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could

152 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

cause your vehicle to pull away unintention- ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot helps you keep the vehicle in the center of the lane by means of moderate steer- ing interventions in a speed range from 0125 mph (0200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera:, at the top of the windshield. In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when you are following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro- vide any support if these conditions do not exist. DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for the function to be available.

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- ing in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, steering inter- vention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The support provided by the system can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- ity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- ted Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Driving systems 153

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated again automatically after a lane change is com- pleted. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro- vide any support: Ron very sharp corners Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the systemwill first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:Steering Assist. On message appears in

the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- ted but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:Steering Assist. Offmessage appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

154 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Further information on deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 155).

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until: appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- tain amount of pressure until disap- pears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park- ing brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The HOLD function is then deactivated. When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- mission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Driving systems 155

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shif- ted into position P automatically.

MAGIC BODY CONTROL

General notes MAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active Body Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN, the CURVE cornering function as well as automatic vehicle stabilization in the event of a crosswind. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension mode is adjusted according to your selection (SPORT, COMFORT or CURVE), the road surface conditions and the vehicle load. A multifunction camera detects bumps in the road surface before the vehicle drives over them. This reduces chassis movements.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehi- cle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind Assist The crosswind stabilization operates by chang- ing wheel loads through distortion of the ABC spring struts. It reduces impairments in handling when driving in a straight line and assists during countersteering.

Crosswind Assist is active in the speed range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control ABC

Vehicle level Mercedes-AMG vehicles: depending on the vehicle level that has been selected, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. All other models: depending on the vehicle level that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.6 in (15mm) as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehi- cle height. In the event of poor road surface conditions, the vehicle automatically raises by up to 0.4 in (10 mm) and harder damping is selected. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road con- ditions and "Raised" for drivingwith snow chains or in particularly poor road conditions. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rare driving faster than approximately 75 mph (120 km/h). Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed above 50 mph (80 km/h)

While driving, the raised level can only be selec- ted at speeds of under 75 mph (120 km/h).

156 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Setting the vehicle level X To raise the vehicle: press button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To lower the vehicle: press button: again. Indicator lamp; goes out.

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Suspension tuning The electro-hydraulically controlled ABC sus- pension systemdetects the vehicle level and the vehicle load and adjusts the setting accordingly. You can also choose between a particularly sporty mode (SPORT), a comfortable mode (COMFORT), as well as a comfortablemodewith cornering function (CURVE). The ABC suspension system is tuned individu- ally to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sporty or com- fort or comfort with the CURVE dynamic cor- nering function Rthe vehicle load Rthe force of the side wind Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in SPORT mode ensures even better contact with the road. The steering response behavior is sporty. Select this mode on winding country roads or highways, for example. Selecting the sports suspension setting X When indicator lamp; is off: press but- ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp; is on. Sports suspension tuning is selected.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen sion System SPORTmessage appears in the multifunction display. All other models: the Active Body Con trol SPORT message appears on the multi- function display.

In COMFORT mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are especially comfortable. The steering response behavior is balanced. Select this mode if you favor a comfortable driving style. Selecting the comfortable suspension setting X When indicator lamp; is off: press but- ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp; is on. Comfortable suspension tuning is selected. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen sion System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. All other models: the Active Body Con trol COMFORTmessage appears on the mul- tifunction display.

In the CURVE driving mode, the vehicle tilts actively when cornering. The tilt function and the comfort suspension tuning increase driving comfort in corners. CURVE is available in the speed range between 18 mph (30 km/h) and 100mph (160 km/h). Select thismode onwind- ing roads in particular. Outside of this speed range, the CURVE driving mode corresponds to the comfort mode. Selecting CURVE driving mode X Press button: repeatedly until both indica- tor lamps; and= light up. CURVE driving mode is selected. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Ride Control CURVEmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display.

Driving systems 157

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

All other models: CURVE driving mode is selected. The Active Body Control CURVE message appears in themultifunction display.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN i This function is not available in all countries. If you have selected the CURVE driving mode, the ROAD SURFACE SCAN function is availa- ble up to speeds of 60 km/h.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of the vehicle using multifunc- tion camera: at the top of the windshield. This function is automatically active if you select comfort suspension tuning. The system is operational at speeds of up to 81 mph (130 km/h). This function allows bumps in the road surface to be detected before the vehicle drives over them. The spring struts are then actuated, with the result that chassis movements are signifi- cantly reduced when driving over bumps. The system is deactivated when you select the raised vehicle level, sports mode or the dynamic cornering function. The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthe road surface is insufficiently lit Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe road surface has no texture or is reflec- tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt, concrete slabs or puddles Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short

Rsections of the route have a very small radius of curvature Rif you accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspen- sion and constant ground clearance, evenwith a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly

158 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp; is not lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Risingmessage appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed above 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp; is lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notes The Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS auto- matically controls the calibration of the damp- ers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- fort

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

i You can choose between the sporty and comfortable mode. One of the two modes is always active.

Sports tuning

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in SPORT mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level in sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

All other models: X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen- sion tuning is selected. The AIRMATIC SPORTmessage appears in the multifunction display.

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the driving speed is higher than 40 mph (70 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm).

Driving systems 159

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. Comfort tuning is selected. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen sion System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. All other models: theAIRMATIC COMFORT message appears on the multifunction dis- play.

If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low- ered by another 0.4 in (10mm) compared to the normal level in comfort mode. All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the driving speed is higher than 100 mph (160 km/h) and "Comfort" mode is activated, the vehicle is automatically lowered by 0.4 in (20 mm).

Load compensation The vehicle can compensate differences in the vehicle level by raising or lowering the axles.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma- nently driven. Together with ESP, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- cle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.

In wintry driving conditions, themaximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you usewinter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- ment for your attention to your immediate sur- roundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

160 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- sideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)

: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners) ; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners) = Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center) ? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 284). Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- evant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Driving systems 161

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle

= Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instru- ment cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear com- partment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read- iness indicator= lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- mine which warning display is active when the engine is running.

Transmission posi- tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards

Rear and front areas activated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- cle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter- mittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp ; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you switch on the ignition.

162 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warn- ing displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indi- cator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warn- ing displays are lit. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 284). X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra- sound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering inter- vention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 160).

Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for park- ing, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly.

Driving systems 163

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 162) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is cal- culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over- hangs or loading ramps.

G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects

You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detection range (Y page 161).

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav- ing blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu- ver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automati- cally when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys- tem independently locates and measures park- ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

164 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- cle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowl- edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press- ing thea button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driv- ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are respon- sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym- bol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure:press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on themultifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth- erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi- function display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.

The Park Assist Active Select R ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi- function display.

Driving systems 165

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Switched Off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applica- tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- ing space after parking is dependent on vari- ous factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also select preselect transmission positionD. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- ble parking position can no longer be ach- ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when exiting the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered into a position at a maximum of 45 to the starting position in the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the

vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure:press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To exit a parking space using Active Park- ing Assist: press thea button on themul- tifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approx- imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park- ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to the message while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com- pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Switched Offmessage appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful if you

166 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 162). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park- ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon- ger possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. The

warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is under a flap in the trunk lid. Rear view camera: is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys- tem. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia system depends on the language setting. The follow- ing are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system.

Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu- vering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). The guide lines on the multimedia system show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. The rear view camera is protected from rain- drops and dust bymeans of a flap.When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

Driving systems 167

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 284). For technical reasons, the flapmay remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera X To activate: make sure that the Activa tion by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see Digital Operator's Manual.

X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The multi- media systemshows the area behind the vehi- cle with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is avail- able throughout the maneuvering process.

X Shift the transmission to position P. or X Drive forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia system The rear view cameramay show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the badge in the trunk lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom- most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmis- sion is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

168 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

: Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 162), addi- tional measurement operational readiness indi- cator; appears in the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays: and= are also active or light up correspondingly in the multi- media system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on. The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on. The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line; reaches park- ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

Driving systems 169

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheel angle

; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steering wheel

= End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line: is then at end of parking space=. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

180 view

: Symbol for the 180 view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a 180 view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 162), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays; light up in the multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.

170 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Object detection The rear view camera can detect moving and stationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrian or another vehicle is detected, these objects are marked with bars. The system is only able to detect and mark stationary objects when your vehicle is moving. When the vehicle is station- ary, moving objects can be detected and marked. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

360 camera (surround view)

General notes The 360 camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system processes images from the follow- ing cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The 360 camera assists you, for instance when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. You can show images from the 360 camera in full-screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the multimedia system. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: RTop view and picture from the rear view cam- era (130 viewing angle) RTop view and image from the front camera (130 viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) RTop view and enlarged rear view RTop view and enlarged front view RTop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) RTop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines are hidden in the multimedia system.

When you change between transmission posi- tions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle

Important safety notes The 360camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incor- rectly or not at all. The 360camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuver- ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuver- ing. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- ers. The 360 camera will not function or will func- tion in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature

Driving systems 171

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 284) Rif the vehicle components in which the cam- eras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360 camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines on the multimedia system show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. The camera in the rear area is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360 camera is activated. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 284). For technical reasons, the flapmay remain open briefly after the 360 camera has been deacti- vated. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi- tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle carrier). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)

Activation conditions The image from the 360 camera appears if: Rthe multimedia system is switched on Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on If the 360 camera is activated at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360 camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the% but- ton.

Switching the 360 camera on/off with the button

X To switch on: press button:. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Rfull screen display with the image from the rear view camera

X To switch off: press button: again.

Switching on the 360 camera andmul- timedia system X Press the button in the center console. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select the 360 camera: turn and press the controller. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

Activating the 360 camera using reverse gear The 360 camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X To show the 360 camera image: engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera.

172 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Selecting the split-screen view and full screen mode Switching between split screen views: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide5 the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. Switching to full screen mode: X Turn and press 180 Viewwith the controller. The 180 option is only available in the following views: RTop view with picture from the rear view cam- era RTop view with picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system

Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom- most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear view camera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle ? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current

steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmis- sion is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 173

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Top view with picture from the front cam- era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam- eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing side camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)

i You can also select the side camera setting for the rear-facing view.

180 view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image

; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180 view can also be selected as front view.

Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.

174 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Exiting 360 camera display mode The 360 camera display is stopped: Rwhen you select transmission position P, or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The viewwhich was active before the 360 cam- era was displayed appears in the multimedia system. You can also stop the 360 camera dis- play split-screen view by selecting the% symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas- ing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- imately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break

Displaying the attention level

The current status information can also be shown in the on-board computer. X Call up the assistance graphic and select ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 197).

The following information appears: RLength of the journey since the last break. RThe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warn- ing, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- board computer (Y page 199). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:

If Standard is selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier.

Driving systems 175

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction dis- play in the assistance graphic display. WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor- responds to the last selection activated (Standard/Sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multi- function display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take aBreak! . In addition to the message shown in the multi- function display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing thea button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con- tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra- tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN- TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is given in the multifunction display, the multimedia system offers a service station search. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are used to determine the current speed limit. Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is also no display for changing traffic signs. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown.

The sign indicating the end of a restriction only appears with the restriction in the instrument cluster when: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail- able sources, no speed limit appears in the instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun- tries. In this case, display: appears in the assistance graphic (Y page 197).

Important safety notes Traffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital streetmap of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.

Activating Traffic Sign Assist X Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display using the on-board computer (Y page 198).

If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist dis- play in the on-board computer, the traffic regu- lations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) appear in the instrument cluster for five seconds in each case. The wrong-way warning and the traffic sign display for speed limits and overtak- ing restrictions remain active even when the display has been deactivated.

176 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic X Call up the assistance graphics display func- tion using the on-board computer (Y page 197). Detected traffic signs appear in the instru- ment cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant

= Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph (60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply. The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum per- mitted speed.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera; picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in the multi- function display. The image shown in the display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam head- lamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedes- trian recognition is active, pedestrians recog- nized by the system are visually highlighted in color in the Night View Assist Plus display with small frame corners. In addition, an infrared camera is integrated into radiator trim:. The camera helps detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the notes on cleaning the infrared camera (Y page 285).

i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic.

Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt your driv- ing style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions.

Driving systems 177

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe infrared camera in the radiator trim is dirty, fogged up or obscured Ron bends, hilltops or downhill gradients Rat high outside temperatures Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. It is possible that, in addition to people and ani- mals, other objects are also marked or highligh- ted .

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notes Pedestrian or animal recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirely obscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehi- cles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the ani- mal in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Rpedestrians or animals do not contrast with the surroundings Rthe camera system no longer recognizes pedestrians as persons due to special cloth- ing or other objects Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Ranimals are not recognized by the system, e.g. because of their size or shape

Pedestrian and animal recognition is deactiva- ted at temperatures above 90 (32 ). The spotlight function and automatic delayed switch-off are then no longer active.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display ; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian rec-

ognition = Highlighting ? Pedestrian recognized Night View Assist Plus can recognize pedes- trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on auto- matically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Rit is dark. If pedestrian recognition is active, readiness symbol; appears. Persons who are detected are highlighted by framing=. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accu- rately by looking at a screen.

Animal recognition Animals can be recognized in the following sit- uations: Rdarkness Routside built-up areas Rbelow an ambient temperature of 90 (32 ).

Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger ani- mals such as deer, cows or horses using typical characteristics.

178 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The system does not detect: Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats Ranimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec- ognizable

When detected, animals are marked with small color frame corners. In contrast to pedestrian recognition, there is no separate readiness sym- bol in the multifunction display.

Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditions You can only activate Night ViewAssist Plus if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 121) or the engine has been started. Rthe light switch is in the or L posi- tion. Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating/deactivating

X Press button:. If Night View Assist Plus is activated, the Night View Assist Plus display is shown in the multifunction display.

The infrared headlamps only switch on in the dark from speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. The infrared headlamps are deactivated at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night View image continues to be displayed until you deactivate it by pressing button:.

Automatic activation You can select the Night View Assist Automatic Activation option via the Night View Assist menu. The pedestrian and animal search function remains active even when the Night View image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Night View image is automatically displayed in themultifunction display as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected. X In the assistancemenu, select automatic acti- vation of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 198).

Spotlight function

General notes Under certain conditions, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash at detected pedes- trians. The spotlight function is only active if: Rpedestrian recognition is active Rthe road surface is not lit Rthe driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h) Rthe "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" func- tion is activated (Y page 107).

The spotlight function is not active or is active only to a limited extent if: Ryou are driving in city traffic Rthere are pedestrians located in the area of an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight function The pedestrian detection with spotlight function is running the background. If the prerequisites are met, the spotlight function uses the head- lamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestrian detected on or near to the road. X In the lightmenu, select the spotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 201).

The spotlight function does not flash at animals.

Driving systems 179

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Display in the assistance graphic X To display the assistance graphic:select the Assistance Graphicmenu using the on- board computer (Y page 197). Pedestrian symbol: in the assistance graphic indicates the status of the spotlight function. If the symbol is displayed not filled in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is displayed filled in, the conditions for the spot- light function are met.

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside. X Fold down camera cover (Y page 285). X Defrost the windshield (Y page 115).

The windshield is iced up. X De-ice the windshield (Y page 115).

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 109).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windshield (Y page 283).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windshield.

The pedestrian and ani- mal recognition is not available.

the infrared camera in the radiator trim is dirty X Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notes The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 180) and Active Lane Keep- ing Assist (Y page 183).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning dis- play in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn sig- nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti- cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-

180 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

sion is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval- uates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen- sors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions care- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- ing, or altering of the device will void any war- ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m); from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= and behind: your vehicle, as shown in the picture. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray

Driving systems 181

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond- ing side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- ted by the flashing of red warning lamp . There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat- eral collision in the monitoring range, a course- correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you ormakes a course-correcting brake appli- cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the exterior mir- ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, a display underlining the danger of a side colli- sion appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-cor- recting brake application may be interrupted at any time by countersteering slightly or acceler- ating.

182 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The course-correcting brake application is avail- able in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a course-cor- recting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or PRE-SAFE Brake. RESP is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 199)

X Switch on the ignition. Warning lamps in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display on the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera: at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping

Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unin- tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in a speed range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recog- nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- ity of the camera

Driving systems 183

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- ted Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor- recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when neces- sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark- ing, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns

you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- cation.

G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the systemmaymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv- ing over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display: appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehi- cle speed. A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking recognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be detected. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncom- ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi- cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.

184 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- erate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration. RESP is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane inwhich you are driving has been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmay not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake applicationmay be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. Rswitch on the turn signal. Rclearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrup- ted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist Onmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made.

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic (Y page 197) appear in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneKeeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 199).

X Select setting Standard or Adaptive. When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra- tion occurs in the following situations: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra- tion occurs in the following situations: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces- sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark- ing, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 185

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only showsmessages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- tion display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illus- tration (Y page 34).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto- matically controls the brightness of the multi- function display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob.

The brightness control is located between the instrument cluster and the multimedia system display (Y page 35). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If you turn the light switch (Y page 104) to the T, or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambi- ent light.

Speedometer segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 145): The segments light up from the stored speed to the end of the scale. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 147): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehi- cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis- play indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multi- function display (Y page 188). There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature is shown in the multifunction dis- play.

186 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is above 257 (125 ) do not drive any further. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower section of the tachometer (Y page 34). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 (124 ).

Operating the on-board computer

: Instrument cluster with multifunction dis- play

; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel

ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly: RScrolls in lists RSelects a menu or function RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects a station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold: RScrolls quickly through all lists RIn the Radio or Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open

a RIn all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources or media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dial- ing the selected number

RSwitches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operat- ing instructions)

% Press briefly: RBack RIn the Radio or Mediamenu: dese- lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources ormedia RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory

% Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Displays and operation 187

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits the telephone book/redial memory

6 RMakes or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory

W X

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys- tem (see the separate operating instructions)

Multifunction display

: Top status bar ; Display = Bottom status bar Display panel; shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. X To open the menu list: press the but- ton on the steering wheel. The menu list appears in display panel;.

Possible top status bar displays: R- - Outside temperature (Y page 186) R# Turn signal, left (Y page 105) RL Low-beam headlamps (Y page 105) RK High-beam headlamps (Y page 105) RT Parking lamps and license plate lamps (Y page 105) R! Turn signal, right (Y page 105) Possible bottom status bar displays: R ECO start/stop function (Y page 124) R HOLD function (Y page 154)

Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 163) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (Y page 106) Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 153) R--- km/h Additional speedometer (Y page 201)

Head-up display

General notes The Head-up Display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. The Head-up Display allows the driver to see all of the information without hav- ing to take their eyes off the road. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RTraffic Sign Assist RNavigation

Important safety notes The Head-up Display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The visibility of the Head-up Display is influ- enced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position Rthe positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters Rwet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the Head-up Display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip- ped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have thewindshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

188 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Displays and operation

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

X Press button:. When the Head-up Display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision.

Standard displays in the Head-up Display

: Navigation messages ; Current speed = Detected instructions and traffic signs ? Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set

speed

AMG displays in the Head-up Display

: Upshift indicator ; Currently selected gear, gearshift options

when shifting manually = Current engine speed ? Current speed

Setting options You can adjust the following settings in the Head-up Display submenu: Radjust the position of the Head-up Display on the windshield (Y page 200) Radjust the brightness of the displays in the Head-up Display (Y page 200) Rselect displays in the Head-up Display (Y page 200). Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, choose between four standard displays. The selected contents then appear in the Head-up Display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the Head-up Display shows AMG-specific contents. If you select a display with traffic signs, detec- ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the Head-up Display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overview Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 187).

Menus and submenus 189

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 190) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 191) RRadio menu (Y page 193) RMedia menu (Y page 194) RTelephone menu (Y page 195) RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 197) RService menu (Y page 197) RSettings menu (Y page 197) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 202)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer- ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom- eter: and odometer; appears.

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

: Range of the fuel supply ; Current fuel consumption = Recuperation display Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis- plays approximate range:. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the display. Approximate range: that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledC appears instead of approximate range:. Recuperation display= shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display= depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles.

ECO display The ECO display is not available in Mercedes- AMG vehicles. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Select ECO Display with: or9.

190 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- matically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 141).

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"

: Distance ; Driving time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select From Start orFrom Reset. The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 191). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset.

Digital speedometer X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the digital speedometer.

Resetting values X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the function that you wish to reset.

X Pressa briefly. X Press: to select Yes and pressa to confirm. You can reset the values of the following func- tions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find fur- ther information on navigation instructions in the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

Menus and submenus 191

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination ; Estimated arrival time = Distance to the next change of direction ? Current road

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Target of the change of direction ; Distance to the change of direction = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane not recommended (dark gray) A Possible lane (light gray) B Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white) On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended?: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible laneA: you will only be able to com- plete the next change of direction in this lane. Recommended laneB: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that.

192 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Change of direction without lane recom- mendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol= for the change of direction and distance graphic;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen- dation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga- tion system

: Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... or Calculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO

You have reached the destination or an inter- mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency band ; Station frequency with memory position = Name of artist ? Name of track A Genre

Menus and submenus 193

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

The multifunction display shows station; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed alongwith station; if this has been stored. You can store radio sta- tions in the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. Currently set station; appears in the multi- function display.

X To open the station list: press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or 9.

X To select the waveband or station mem- ory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select thewaveband or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information about radio operation can be found in the multimedia system in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playback mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in theMedia menu. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: RCD or DVD RSD card RMedia Register RUSB storage device RBluetooth capable audio device

Please observe further information on media support and media operation in the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audio media

: Media source, e.g. name of current CD ; Current title = Name of artist ? Name of album A Folder name Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

194 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To select an audio player or media:press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond- ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm the selection. X To open the track list:press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous track from the track list:press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the button, the speed of rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio player or media, the multifunction display shows the following: Rtrack number Rtrack name Rartist Ralbum The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To select a DVD single drive or disc:press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond- ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm the selection. X To open the scene list:press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in the scene list:press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling:press and hold: or9 until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- facturers operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system. X Establish a Bluetooth connection to themul- timedia system (see Digital Operator's Man- ual).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

Menus and submenus 195

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

You will see one of the following display mes- sages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a net- work and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Telephone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected. X Press the6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call X Press the~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button to switch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the names one after the other.

or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 for longer than one second. The names are displayed quickly one after the other in the phone book. If you press and hold the: or9 button for longer than five seconds, the name appears with the next or previous letter initial letter in the alphabet. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the6 ora button to start dialing.

or X If there is more than one telephone num- ber for a particular name:press the6 or a button to display the numbers.

X Press: or9 to select the number you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing. or X To exit the phone book: press the~ or % button briefly.

Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select the desired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

196 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Assistance graphic menu

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDistance display of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147) RSpotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 201) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 64) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 68) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 180) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 175) RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 183)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.

Service menu

Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in theService menu: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 203) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 309)

RCalling up the service due date (Y page 279). RChecking the engine oil level using the on- board computer (Y page 275) (Mercedes- AMG S 65 only)

Settings menu

Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 197) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 200) RChanging the light settings (Y page 201) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 201) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 202)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP (Y page 67).

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel For further information about ESP, see (Y page 66). X Start the engine. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Menus and submenus 197

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select ESP. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again.

ESP is deactivated if the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 234). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 204).

Automatic activation of Night View Assist Plus X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to selectNight View Assist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again.

If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation is switched on, the night vision image is automat- ically shown in the multifunction display if an object is detected (Y page 179). For further information about Night View Assist Plus (Y page 177).

Activating/deactivating Traffic Sign Assist Under certain conditions, the Traffic SignAssist function allows you to choose if traffic signs and messages should be displayed in the lower part of the speedometer.

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to selectTraffic Sign Assist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again. Traffic signs and messages appear in the lower part of the speedometer if the function is activated.

For further information about Traffic Sign Assist, see (Y page 176).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the9 or: button to select Collision Prevention. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu. For further information about COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 64).

198 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE Brake PRESAFE Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again.

When PRE-SAFE Brake is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction dis- play in the Assistance Graphic menu. For more information on PRESAFE Brake, see (Y page 68).

Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot Assist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, white radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the AssistanceGraphic.

For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 180).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST. X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: or9 to select Off, Standard or Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 175).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to selectLane Keeping Assist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection, Standard or Adaptive, appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again. For further information about Active Lane Keep- ing Assist, see (Y page 183).

Menus and submenus 199

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist Using the Display Content function, you can choose from up to four display options depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected contents appear in the Head-up Display. InMercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the Head-up Display shows AMG- specific contents. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Display Content. X Pressa to confirm. A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired dis- play.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion.

For further information about the traffic sign displays, see Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 176). Further information on navigation displays can be found in the multimedia system (see the Dig- ital Operator's Manual).

Setting the position You can adjust the position of the Head-up Dis- play on the windshield. You can compensate for height differences if the seat positions are changed, for example. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 189). X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Position function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. X Press: or9 to adjust the position to a level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the set position of theHead-upDisplay as a single memory preset (Y page 102).

Setting the brightness The brightness of the Head-up Display is auto- matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient light. You can also individually adjust the bright- ness of the Head-up Display. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 189). X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Brightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. X Press: or9 to adjust the brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

200 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Light submenu

Switching the spotlight function on/off X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select theSpotlight function. X Press thea button to save the setting. When the spotlight function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the pedestrian symbol.

Further information on the spotlight function (Y page 179).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Lights sub- menu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light in the multifunction display is shown in white and blue.

X Press thea button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 104).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc- tion display.

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function. The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rspeedometer Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu Radditional speedometer in the status area on the multifunction display The unit in the additional speedometer is dis- played inversely to the selected distance unit. Rthe odometer and trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer on/off The Additional Speedometer [km/h] func- tion allows you to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display shows the speed digitally. The unit in the additional speed- ometer is always inverse to the speedometer unit. X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Pressa to confirm your selection.

Menus and submenus 201

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

Restoring the factory settings X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu. X Pressa to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes. X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion. If you have selected and confirmed Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is only reset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator

? Transmission fluid temperature A Engine oil temperature X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP= indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine/transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at nor- mal operating temperature, oil tempera- ture? andA are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temper- ature? orA in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- put during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program C, S or M ; ESP mode (ON/OFF) = Suspension setting SPORT or COMFORT X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button until the SETUP display appears.

202 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages

Introduction

General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 154) RParking (Y page 137)

Hiding display messages X Pressa or% on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory. If there are no displaymessages, the No Messagesmessage appears in themultifunction display. When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 203

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) are temporarily not available. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru- ment cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

204 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 205

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T! Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP are malfunc- tioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru- ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 140). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 140).

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: X Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

206 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 140). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con- tinues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 322). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 207

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 140). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inoperative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- voltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

208 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canada only) Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USAonly: the red$ brake systemwarning lamp also lights upwhile the engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Prevention Assist PlusCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Restart the engine.

Display messages 209

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Prevention Assist PlusInoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator'sManual Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator's Manual

PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRESAFE PLUS and PRESAFE Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsLimited See Operator's Manual PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal- function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

210 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Manual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RPRE-SAFE PLUS RPRE-SAFE Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. A warning tone also sounds. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis- appears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 284). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears.

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 41).

Display messages 211

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Front Left Malfunction ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 Rear Left Malfunction ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required orRight Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin- tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

212 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's Manual The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag will not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta- neously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front- passenger knee bag (Y page 49) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi- function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi- function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu- pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see (Y page 49).

Display messages 213

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled SeeOperator's Manual The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey although: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.

G WARNING The front-passenger air bag and the front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter- pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta- neously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front- passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 49) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi- function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi- function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu- pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

214 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see (Y page 49).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Left Low Beam (Example)

The bulb in question is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 108).

i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

b Malfunction SeeOperators Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Auto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Switch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to position.

b Switch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. X Turn the light switch to position L or.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Currently UnavailableSee Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inop- erative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is available again.

Display messages 215

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+ Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 277).

If you have to add coolant frequently: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning. X At coolant temperatures below 257 (125), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun- tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

? Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out and the coolant temperature is below 257 (125 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge. If the temperature increases again: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 (124 ).

216 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# See Operator's Manual

The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manual display message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running

The battery condition of charge is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

# Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged.

Display messages 217

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4 Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 275). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276). If you have to add engine oil frequently: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali- fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes- benz.com.

4 Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart) (USA) Check EngineOil Level (Add 1Liter) (Canada)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 275). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276). If you have to add engine oil frequently: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes- benz.com.

4 Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 275). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).

8 Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

218 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8 Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Display messages 219

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi- cle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac- teristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC MalfunctionStop Vehicle The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message. The vehicle is leaking oil. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message. Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Vehicle RisingPlease Wait Briefly The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

220 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Clean the windshield.

Active Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Restart the engine.

Active Blind SpotAssist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter- vention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc- tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

Display messages 221

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 163).

Park Assist Inoperative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 163).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbol is not shown in the multifunction display): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistSwitched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically.

Night View AssistCurrently Unavailable Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthe outside temperature is too high. X Clean the windshield. X Clean the camera in the radiator trim. If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem- peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has cooled down. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View AssistInoperative Night View Assist Plus is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

222 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Spotlight Inoperative Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthe outside temperature is too high. X Clean the windshield. X Clean the camera in the radiator trim. If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem- peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has cooled down. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Off

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 154).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto- matically (Y page 147).

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147).

Display messages 223

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Currently UnavailableSee Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioning The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147).

224 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam- ple. RESP is deactivated. The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 145). or X Reactivate ESP (Y page 197).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto- matically (Y page 145).

Display messages 225

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 311).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 288).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 288).

226 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavailable Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sensor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul- tifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special- ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative NoWheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi- tion R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi- tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart Engine With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans- mission out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine.

Display messages 227

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans- mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction. The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo- nents. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi- tion N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cooling

The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

228 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

_ Lock Seat BackrestFront Left or FrontRight Seat BackrestNot Locked

The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Power Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 229

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 278).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. a warning tone sounds X Remove the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 75).

Don't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. a warning tone sounds This display message is displayed in the multifunction display for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not Detected (white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

230 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Not Detected (red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen- trally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Locate the SmartKey. X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning tone ceases.

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Safety systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 233

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam- ple. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J !

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam- ple. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

234 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 67).

N The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 235

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica- tions. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 67).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP checked.

F! NF (USA only) or! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten- tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 41).

236 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Engine

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant temperature gauge is at the beginning of the cold range. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 237

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 277).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257 (125 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 (124 ). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 277).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

238 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X At coolant temperatures below 257 (125 ), you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on PRESAFE Brake (Y page 68). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 64).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 239

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit. The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac- tion. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 288).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) flashes for approximately oneminute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Vehicle

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 241

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera- tor's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- igation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons ormap display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip- ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs).

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric- ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.

242 Function restrictions M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Operating system

Overview

General notes Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-con- trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely.

Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- age to the display.

Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the button on the center console to the right of the controller. When you switch themultimedia system on, a warning message will appear. The multimedia system calls up the previously selectedmenu. If you switch the multimedia system off, play- back of the current media source will also be switched off.

Adjusting the volume X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con- troller.

or X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel. The volume of the media source currently selected changes.

The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or off X Press the thumbwheel beside the controller. or X Press the8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the8 symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.

i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted.

Functions The multimedia system has the following func- tions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions

Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned3 Rslid left or right1 Rslid forwards or back4 Rslid diagonally2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back button You can use the% button to exit amenu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode.

Operating system 243

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

X To exit the menu: briefly press the% button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

X To call up the basic display: press the% button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.

The telephone keypad or touchpad Themultimedia system is equipped with either a telephone keypad or a touchpad. The telephone keypad is touch-sensitive. As soon as one or several of the keys are gently touched, the telephone keypad is shown in the multimedia system's display. The key being touched is highlighted. As an alternative to the controller, the touchpad enables menu items to be selected and charac- ter entry including handwriting recognition, for example.

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQTouchpadQActivate Touchpad. The touchpad is switched on O or off .

Operating the touchpad The touchpad is available in two versions.

Variant 1 : Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button

= Quick access for audio ? Back button

Variant 2 : Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up quick access for audio and tele-

phone ? Back button Navigating in menus and lists can be done via touch-sensitive surface: by swiping with your finger. X To select themenu item: swipe up, down, to the left or right.

X Press the touchpad. X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc- tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func- tion: X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up or down with two fingers.

X To increase or reduce the vehicle and sound settings: turn two fingers to the right or left.

X To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec- ognition

Entering characters X Use one finger to write characters on the sur- face. The character is entered in the input line. If the character that you have entered can be

244 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

interpreted in different ways, these character suggestions are displayed.

X If character suggestions are shown, turn and press the controller.

X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

: Active input line ; To insert a space = Character entered on the touchpad ? To delete characters X To display the menu: press the touchpad.

: To exit the menu ; To return to handwriting recognition = To use the phone book or text templates ? To select the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursor A To switch the language B To finish character entry X To select the input line: selectp. X Swipe up or down. X To move the cursor within the input line: selectp.

X Swipe to the left or right. X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an input line is selected.

X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQTouchpadQRead Out Handwriting Recognition. The read-aloud function is switched on O or off .

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Swipe upwards on the touchpad with two fin- gers. The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/ music track: glide to the right or left. The selected station/music track is played.

Quick access for telephone

Sending DTMF tones Requirement: the touchpad is equipped with version 2. The function is not supported by all mobile phones (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Swipe upwards on the touchpad with two fin- gers during a phone call. Quick access is displayed.

X To select characters: glide your finger to the left or right and press. Every character selected will be transmitted immediately.

Operating system 245

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Switching the character entry between touchpad and controller Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X To switch to the controller: press the con- troller. Character entry using the controller is active.

X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch- pad with your finger. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favorites X To call up: press theg button on the con- troller or on the touchpad.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle. The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite ; Renames a selected favorite = Moves a selected favorite ? Deletes a selected favorite X Press theg button. X Slide6 the controller. The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign. The categories are displayed.

X Select a category. The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favorite X Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Press and hold theg button until the favorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notes You have the following options for adjusting cli- mate control settings: Rusing the climate control bar Rusing the climate control menu You can set the most important climate control functions such as temperature, airflow and air distribution using the climate control bar. The climate control bar is visible in most displays. You can find all the climate control functions in the climate control menu. You can use the cli- mate control bar to switch to the climate control menu.

Overview You can set the most important climate control functions directly in the climate control bar and change them in the climate control menu.

246 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

: Adjusts temperature, airflow and air distri- bution, left, as well as displaying the current setting

; Calls up the climate control menu, displays the current cooling and climate mode set- ting

= Adjusts air distribution, airflow and temper- ature on the right and displays the current settings

There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system: X Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated.

Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system: X Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated.

X To select from climate control bar;: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting climate control func- tions is activated.

X To select a climate function: turn and press the controller. The selected climate control function appears.

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settings The climate mode determines the type of air- flow. When the air-conditioning system is set to , the setting is active (Y page 114). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X To selectClimate Mode: turn and press the controller.

X To change sides: slide the controller left 8 or right9

X To change the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the% button. The climate mode bar displays the current air- flow setting: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS. Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer The perfume atomizermakes it possible to scent the air in individual compartments in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 117). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X To selectAir Freshener: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press the controller.

X To set the intensity: turn the controller when the atomizer is switched on.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Switching the ionization on/off The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 118). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X To selectIonization: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To switch the ionization on or off: turn the controller.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Operating system 247

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Adjusting the footwell temperature X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X To selectAdjust Footwell: turn and press the controller.

X To change sides: slide1 the controller. X To change the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli- mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica- tion on/off i Activating the cooling with air dehumidifi- cation facilitates the cooling of the vehicle interior even with high outside temperatures.

X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated.

X To selectO A/C: turn and press the con- troller.

X The cooling with air dehumidification function is activated O or deactivated .

i The current status of the cooling function is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON activated, A/C OFF deactivated.

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi- fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set- tings Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli- mate control setting for all zones together O or separately . X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 247).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated.

X To selectO Sync: turn and press the con- troller.

X The synchronization function is activated O or deactivated .

With the synchronization function switched off, you can alternate between driver and front passenger. X To switch from the footer to the main area: slide5 the controller.

X To switch between left and right: slide1 the controller. Not all climate control functions allow switch- ing between the driver and front passenger.

For further information on synchronizing climate control settings, see (Y page 115).

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system.

General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends onGPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: X Select NaviQNavigation. Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.

248 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

X Select QRoute Settings. X Select a route type. Notes for route types: REco Route Calculates an economic route. RDynamic Traffic Route Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- ance are taken into account (only available in the USA). RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. Instead of Start, select the Continue menu item.

X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options.

X Select a route option. X WhenUse Toll Roads is selected, select the payment type.

Notes for route options: RUse Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated.

Entering an address Multimedia system: X Select NaviQNavigation. Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller. X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rcountry, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City. The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city. TheG symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control- ler.

X Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry: Rsearch for free destination search The free destination search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destina- tions. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue. The route is calculatedwith the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Destination.Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destina- tion. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate des- tinations list.

Operating system 249

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth-capablemobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. You can also connect your mobile phone via NFC (Near FieldCommunication) with the multimedia system. For more information (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQActivate Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth O. Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Blue- tooth visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth device names for all of oneman- ufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the follow- ing information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RMessages

i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone without NFC with the multimedia system, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple

Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automati- cally after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia sys- tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: X Select PhoneQConnect Device. X Select Search for Phones. X Select Start Search. The available mobile phones are displayed in the device list.

Symbols in the device list

Sym- bol

Explanation

New mobile phone found, not yet authorized.

Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected

# Mobile phone is authorized and connected

Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimedia system.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization.

250 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Authorization by entering a passkey (pass- code): X Select mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi- nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Selectb. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to themultimedia sys- tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X Select PhoneQConnect Device. X Select mobile phone.

Media mode

General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Fur- ther information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple devices (e.g. iPhone) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RCD RDVD video RSD cards RAUX cable Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth

i Information on the DVD changer or single DVD drive (see the Digital Operator's Man- ual).

Using the device list Multimedia system: X Select MediaQDevices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source. Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing an SD card

Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehi- cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is located in the stowage com- partment under the armrest. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the con- tacts must face downwards.

X Select the media source (Y page 251).

Removing an SD card X Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devices

Operating system 251

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 251).

Connecting to an external audio/video source The socket for the audio/video AUX jack is loca- ted in the stowage compartment in the center console. To connect an external audio source to the AUX jack, an audio AUX cable is required. To connect an external video source, a video AUX cable is required. X Connect the video/audio AUX cable to the AUX jack.

X Select the media source (Y page 251). X Start playback of the external audio/video source (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

i Videos cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.

252 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- sible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 253).

Stowage areas 253

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove box flap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards until it engages.

The glove box contains: Ra coin holder Ra pen holder Rthree credit card holders Ra holder for the multimedia system remote control

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key (Y page 74). X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise to position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:. The eyeglasses compartment opens down- wards.

X To close: press marking: again and the eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartments in the center con- sole

X To open: briefly press marking;. X To close: push stowage compartment: in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

254 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: or; and fold the armrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- lowing may be in the stowage space: Ran AUX-IN jack Ra multimedia connector unit with USB port, e.g. for iPod, iPhone orMP3 player (see the Digital Operator's Manual)

Stowage compartments in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled up fluores- cent jacket and a small umbrella in stowage compartment; in the doors. In doors: you can store bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest

X To open: fold down the seat armrest. X Pull handle: and fold the cover upwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-com- partment center console

X To open: if required, fold up the rear seat armrest.

X Slide cover: in the direction of the arrow.

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

Stowage areas 255

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X To open: fold down the rear armrest. X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Stowage nets Stowage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and front- passenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 253) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 253).

Securing loads using parcel net hooks

General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RSecure the load using the parcel net hooks RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

There are four parcel net hooks in the trunk.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

X To open: open the trunk lid. X Press handle: on the ribbing downwards. Handle: folds upwards.

X Swing trunk floor; upwards using handle: until it rests against the trunk partition.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of the trunk floor.

256 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Clip hook= into groove?. X To close: unclip hook= from groove?. X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the under- side of the trunk floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 253).

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center con- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con- centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the front center console

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 254).

X Open the protective flap if necessary. X To remove: slide catch: forwards and pull the cup holder upwards.

X To insert: make sure that the protective flap is closed.

X Insert the cup holder and slide catch: back. You can remove the cup holder and the rubber mat for cleaning. Clean them with clean, luke- warm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

Features 257

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder: or;. Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING If themirror cover of the vanitymirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

: Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:. X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;. X Swing sun visor: to the side. X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening or closing process is briefly stopped. The roller sunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged.

At temperatures below 4 (20 ) the roller sunblind cannot be operated.

258 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Extending/retracting from the driver's seat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To extendor retract: briefly press button:. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

X To open: briefly press marking?. Stowage compartment= opens.

X To remove the insert: grip the sides of insert:, push it forward and pull it upwards;.

X To re-install the insert: press insert: into the drawer until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartment= closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart- ment

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X To open: briefly press marking=. Stowage compartment; opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:. Cigarette lighter:will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartment; closed until it locks.

Features 259

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

12 V sockets

General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may dis- charge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- board voltage is too low, the power to the sock- ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front center console

X To open: briefly press marking=. Stowage compartment; opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:. X To close: press stowage compartment; closed until it locks.

Socket in the rear compartment

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 255).

X Open socket cover: or;. X To close: close the cover of the stowage compartment.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

Coolbox in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool- box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Always make sure that the ventilation grille is not covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in the trunk. The coolbox can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). If you want to store a bottle in the upper com- partment of the coolbox, the capacity of the bottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l). Store only plastic bottles in the upper compart- ment of the coolbox.

260 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Using the coolbox

X Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

X To open: pull handle: on the cover. X Fold the cover out to the front. X To switch cooling level to low: press but- ton; once. An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: press but- ton; twice. Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button; repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends on the ambient temperature and the selected cool- ing level. The coolbox reduces its cooling output or switches off, if: Rmany electrical consumers are turned on Rthe starter battery is not sufficiently charged This is indicated by the flashing indicator lamps in the button. The cooling function will automat- ically switch back on as soon as there is suffi- cient voltage.

Caring for the coolbox If you do not need to use the coolbox for an extended period you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

You can remove the coolbox for maintenance purposes. X To remove: switch off the coolbox. X Pull plug; down and out. X Unscrew both screws=. X Pull out the coolbox. X Close flap:. X To install: swing flap: to the side until it is locked in place by the magnets.

X Insert the coolbox. X Tighten both screws=. X Connect plug;.

mbrace

General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate thembrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, con- tact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Features 261

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Cus- tomer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel.

or X Use the multimedia system volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RInfo call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- tem carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. Rthe indicator lamp in the Info call button does not light up during the system self-diag- nosis

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol- lowing buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - Info call button Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoperative or Service Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehi- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regula- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 261). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

262 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig- gered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated man- ually. As soon as the emergency call has been initi- ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc- tion display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- ated, a voice connection is automatically estab- lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu- pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emer- gency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indi- cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu- ously. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second;. The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:. If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing SOS button;, you do not know if mbrace has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call: press Roadside Assistance but- ton:. This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus- tomer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the

Features 263

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- ton on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 267). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech- nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Road- side Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- work is not available, for example. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

Info call button

X To call: press Info call button:. This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus- tomer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Info call button: flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- ton on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser- vice Center and about other products and serv- ices from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com.

264 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the Info call button is flashing continuously Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- work is not available, for example. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe~ button on themultifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi- gation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and subse- quently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys- tem. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa- ble and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance This service is part of thembrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the route assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- rent position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.

Search & Send

General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Features 265

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Specifying and sending the destination address X Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e- mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on theweb- site. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the cor- responding field.

X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up a transmitted destination address X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and subse- quently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswith mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail- able and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- tion Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num- ber and password.

Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be valet locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines:

266 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- tion Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num- ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.

X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified.

Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved sup- port for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assis- tance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request forVehicle Diagnostics Received Startvehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice connection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transferring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep- resentative agreed with you, the voice connec- tion is re-established after the transfer is com- plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer AssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 30).

Features 267

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 27).

Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation sys- tem. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Own- ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the naviga- tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the dis- play. If you select No, the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start. Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again.

Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assis- tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was excee- ded Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee- ded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areaswhich the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif- ferent settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call and notify the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo-fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes The HomeLink garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instruc- tions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage

268 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following tele- phone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink and/or com- patible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 28). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, per- sons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 269).

Garage door remote controlA is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con- trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in program- ming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow. Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon as button;,= or? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been pro- gramed, indicator lamp: will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: point garage door remote controlA towards but- tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control A until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro- gramming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The rolling code must be synchronized (Y page 270).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote con- trolA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system.

Features 269

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 269). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- ming additional remote controls", before carry- ing out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programed button;,= or? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then com- plete.

Notes on programming the remote con- trol Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open- ers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Release the button. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con- trolA for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control A again for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro- gramming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote con- trolA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear- view mirror, take note of the following instruc- tions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote controlA and whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- quency can usually be found on the back of remote controlA for the garage door drive.

270 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

The garage door opener is compatible with devices which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote controlA. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from but- tons; to?which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote controlA is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote controlA. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal recep- tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Press button;,= or? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- cator lamp: lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indi- cator lamp: flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Press and hold buttons; and?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.

X Release buttons; and?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the corresponding front seat forwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs: onto retainers; until you hear them engage.

Features 271

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain- ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehi- cle interior frombecoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves from penetrating the windshield up into the gigahertz range. In order to operate radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas: on the windshield are permeable to radio waves. You can install radio-controlled devices in these areas. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.

272 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys- tem work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition sys- tem or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wip- ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 273

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood. The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Radiator Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a thermal mat or insect protection cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic systemmay otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read- ings are required by law andmust be accurate at all times.

Engine oil

Important safety notes

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- ponents before starting the engine.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.

274 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approx- imately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem- perature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30minutes before carrying out the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- stick (except Mercedes-AMG S 65)

Example: checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guide tube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:. X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark= and MAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

Checking the oil level using the on- board computer (Mercedes-AMG S 65)

Calling up the oil level check X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 121).

X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Engine OilLevel submenu. X Pressa to confirm the selection. The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Level mes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. A mes- sage appears in the multifunction display. The messages are described in the following chap- ter.

Oil level display messages in the multifunction display Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 Liter) The oil level is too low. X Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Engine compartment 275

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Reduce Engine OilLevel The engine oil level is too high. X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilLevel Ignition MustBe On The ignition is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 121).

Need More Time toCheck Engine OilLevel The required waiting period was not observed. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the meas- urement after about five minutes. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement after approximately 30 minutes.

Engine Oil LevelNot Measurable withEngine Running The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible. X Switch off the engine. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about five minutes before carrying out the measurement. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicleswith a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: adding engine oil X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

276 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again using the oil dipstick (except Mercedes-AMG S 65) (Y page 275).

X Check the oil level again using the on-board computer (Mercedes-AMG S 65) (Y page 275).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 332).

Additional service products

Important safety notes

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury.

Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

Checking coolant level

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.

Engine compartment 277

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Example: checking the coolant level X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 121).

X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster (Y page 187). The coolant temperature must be below 158 (70 ).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

or X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 121).

X Slowly turn cap: counter-clockwise and to relieve excess pressure.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neck whenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan- sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see (Y page 333).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: adding fluid to the windshield washer system

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab. X Place cap: on the edge of the filler neck and engage in place.

X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap: onto the filler neck until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l), a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to addwasher fluid (Y page 230). Further information on washer fluid (Y page 334).

ASSYST PLUS

Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book- let). Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

278 ASSYST PLUS M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Mercedes-Benz Center, or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 275).

The multifunction display shows a service mes- sage for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in XX Days RService A Due RService A Overdue by XX Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- ule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnect- ing the battery.

or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the ser- vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.

Displaying service messages X Switch the ignition on. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and confirm with a.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con- firm witha. The service due date appears in the multi- function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist work- shop. Have service work carried out as described in theMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checkedmore often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

ASSYST PLUS 279

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsibleman- ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that: Rthe side windows are fully closed Rthe blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0 Rthe 360 camera or rear view camera is switched off

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- tion lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis- sion position D or R the automatic trans- mission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission

280 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in positionN neu- tral: Operating with the SmartKey: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if neces- sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Engage park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if neces- sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country.

X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equip- ment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTires RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. RElectrical components RBattery RConnectors RLamps RSeals RTrim RVentilation slots

Care 281

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommen- ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has penetrated the paint surface. Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become dull. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.

X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more spe- cifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident.

282 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances pre- vent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to elec- tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph- ite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (Y page 109).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light len- ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig- nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Care 283

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360 camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360 camera with a power washer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

or X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 121).

X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system; see Digital Operator's Manual.

X To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens:.

The camera cover closes automatically: Rif you are driving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h) Rif the ignition is switched off

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

284 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Interior care

Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam- age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer- cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

Cleaning the camera behind the wind- shield ! Never clean the camera lens.When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems,make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in front of camera;.

Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim

Camera lens: is cleaned at regular intervals by operating the windshield washer system. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam- era lens: when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deploy- ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.

Care 285

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plas- tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- tor lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ments ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes ! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of

286 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 (80) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 287

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notes Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. If your vehicle is equipped with a tire- change tool kit, it is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more infor- mation onwhich tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist work- shop. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor ; Towing eye = Tire sealant filler bottle X Open the trunk lid. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 289).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtires with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tires) (Y page 289) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi- cles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 288) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 321). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock (Y page 121).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 123).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

288 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bear- ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 316). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure losswarningmessage appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 226). Rcheck the tire for damage. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi- cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- tance possible depends upon: RVehicle speed RRoad condition ROutside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that

you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tires). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera- tures down to 4 (20 ).

Flat tire 289

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eightminutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturers safety instruc- tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com- pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa- nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well under- neath the trunk floor (Y page 288).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

290 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X Pull connector? with cable and hoseA out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwards into recess; of the tire inflation compres- sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faulty tire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC. X Insert plug? into cigarette lighter socket (Y page 259) or into another 12 V socket of the vehicle (Y page 260).

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflation compressor to position I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation com- pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximumof fiveminutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- sure reached" (Y page 291). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 291). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible.

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres- sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

Flat tire 291

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla- tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- sure release buttonEnext to pressure gauge F.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla- tion compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop

292 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS (Y page 62) and ESP (Y page 66). Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-start- ing. Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam- ple: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the car- pet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- tact with vehicle parts. RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat- tery. RIt is important that you observe the descri- bed order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.

Battery (vehicle) 293

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

! Always havework on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Rswitch off the ignition. Ralways disconnect the negative terminal clamp first, followed by the positive termi- nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P. After the work has been done, install the bat- tery and replace the cover of the positive ter- minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro- tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Electrolyte is corrosive. Avoid con- tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with clean water. Con- tact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be suffi- ciently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special- ist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

Charging the 12 V battery Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.4 V.

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

294 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tures below freezing point. When jump-start- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 295). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order

as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 295).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Do not charge a battery which has been removed at low temperatures with a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com- partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Jump-starting 295

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven- tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles:

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump- start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RAll vehicles exceptMercedes-AMGvehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

296 Jump-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 121).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood.

Example: ground point cover X Turn fasteners: one turn and remove. X Remove the cover while pressing down on cap; of the washer fluid reservoir.

Position numberD identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

Jump-starting 297

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Slide coverC of positive terminal= in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal= on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryD using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal= on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryD to ground pointB of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryD first.

X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointB and negative terminalA, then from pos- itive clamp= and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X After removing the jumper cables, close coverC of positive terminal=. X Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned pre- cisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press fasteners: into the mountings. Turn the fasteners by of a turn to engage. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- over.

There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (Y page 329).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur- poses as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

298 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmis- sion may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 79). You could other- wise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover.

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under covers:. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit or the stowage tray (Y page 288).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Attach cover: to the bumper and press until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit or the stowage tray.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 298). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionPwhen you open the driver's or front- passenger door or when you remove the Smart- Key from the ignition lock.

Towing and tow-starting 299

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

In order to ensure that the automatic transmis- sion stays in positionNwhen towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X You must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 121).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.

X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 106).

In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

General notes

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axlesmust be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged.

! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur- poses. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical sys- tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 295). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- age the automatic transmission.

i Information on "Jump-starting" (Y page 295).

300 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is in the vehicle document wallet. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- nents on the circuit and their functions stop operating. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep- ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper- ation of the fuses.

Before changing a fuse Observe the important safety notes (Y page 301) X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers.

X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 121).

or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 121).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk

Dashboard fuse box The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the dashboard. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well

X Open the front-passenger door. X Fold cover: down and remove it.

Fuses 301

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

X Open the hood (Y page 273). X To open: release retaining clamps: and remove cover;.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

X Undo screws= on the fuse box. X Remove fuse box cover? forwards. X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor- rectly in cover?.

X Insert cover? at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.

X Fold down cover? of the fuse box and tighten screws=.

X Insert cover; and secure with retaining clamps:.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk

X Open the trunk lid. X Prise open cover: with a flat object at the top right and top left-hand side.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction of the arrow.

302 Fuses Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Important safety notes

G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel

G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warn- ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- rectly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- shop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations

Information on the sizes and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 326). Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 312) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 137) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 306)

Operation

Information on driving Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull- ing to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires

Operation 303

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 304). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- sure as necessary (Y page 306). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- ditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: in (3 mm) RM+S tires: in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approx- imately in (1.6mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 289). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an active tire pressure monitor and

304 Operation W he el s an d tir es

only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes- Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 289). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 321).

Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 (+7), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing thei snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specif- ically for driving in snow. UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteris- tics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 309). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 311).

Snow chains

G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- tire combinations (Y page 326). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.

Winter operation 305

W he el s an d tir es

Z

RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 31 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 158) or MBC (Magic Body Control) (Y page 156), you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been mounted. RIf snow chains have been mounted, you must not use Active Parking Assist (Y page 163).

You may wish to deactivate ESP (Y page 67) when pulling away with snow chains mounted. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driv- ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires includ- ing the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-

cle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 312). The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example).

306 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lowing tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 316).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud- den loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer.

Tire pressure 307

W he el s an d tir es

Z

The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- sures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 137)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- ular wear, which can severely impair the brak- ing properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- mended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 306).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

308 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 306). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 312) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 137) Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 306).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon- itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is

shown in the Servicemenu of themultifunction display; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 310).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

Tire pressure 309

W he el s an d tir es

Z

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequencewill be repeated every time the vehi- cle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- minated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incom- patible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 306). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub- stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 311). The current pres- sures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 306). The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a

halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- functioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 226). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- sure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- board computer may differ from those meas- ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmit- ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) thatmay be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).

X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Press thea button.

310 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pressure. X Press thea button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon- itor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes- sages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessage appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud- denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 226). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres- sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur- rently set tire pressure as the reference values

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new refer- ence values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen- ded for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 306). You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pres- sure table inside the fuel filler flap (Y page 306).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Press thea button. X Press9 or: to select Tire Pressure. X Press thea button. The current tire pressure for each wheel or the Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message will be displayed in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Valuesmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes- sage appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pres- sures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 311

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Radio type approval for the tire pres- sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occu- pants and themaximumpermissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B- pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden- tification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor- mation about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight: is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

312 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information plac- ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle- specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur- suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail- able amount of cargo and luggage load capa- city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity cal- culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 312). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Example 1 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Loading the vehicle 313

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5 RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 2 - Rear: 3 RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) - Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) - Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) - Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) - Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3 RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 1 - Rear: 2 RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) - Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) - Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

Example 3 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2 RDistribution of the occupants:

- Front: 1 RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg)

314 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- fully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 312). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi- mumpermissible load that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu- pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers

have to grade tires using three performance fac- tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corre- sponding quality grading markings on the side- wall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat- utory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli- mate.

Traction

G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- acteristics.

All about wheels and tires 315

W he el s an d tir es

Z

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas- ured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 304). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking dis- tance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro- priate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 305).

Temperature

G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 319)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 319)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 318) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 308) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 319) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 316) D Load index (Y page 318) E Tire name The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- city and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

316 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- tion (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufac- turing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man- ufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emer- gency. Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula- ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code:tire code= specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 312). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 318). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 318). Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the man- ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load- bearing indexA and speed ratingB. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications,

All about wheels and tires 317

W he el s an d tir es

Z

ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the max- imum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" rep- resents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maxi- mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR",and the service specifica- tion must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi- cates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man- ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+Smarking, winter tires also have thei snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require- ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa- tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than themaximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 326).

Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist work- shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load index: may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 316). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on themaximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis- sible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

318 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 312).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man- ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety- relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? and manufacturing dateA. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol:marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- portation. Manufacturer identification code: manufac- turer identification code; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 326). Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- endar week. Positions three and four represent

the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grad- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer

All about wheels and tires 319

W he el s an d tir es

Z

following specifications from the U.S. govern- ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi- mum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants,

fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.

Curb weight Theweight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- tem and optional equipment if these are instal- led in the vehicle, but does not include passen- gers or luggage.

Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permis- sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

320 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an out- ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur- face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on thewheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- formance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capa- city of a tire.

Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 288) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv- ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 289).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- dent. Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Changing a wheel 321

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 322). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord- ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotate every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depend- ing on the degree of tire wear. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota- ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary (Y page 311).

Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- planing. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor- mal" for AIRMATIC (Y page 158) or Active Body Control (ABC) (Y page 156).

X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 121).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 123).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 288). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards:. X Fold out lower plate;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate=.

322 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other- wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi- cle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down- hill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll- ing away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On a

slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RDo not place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with AMGwheels and hub caps: the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic hub caps: X To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap: is in the open position. To do this, turn the center cover counter-clockwise.

X Position hub cap: and turn the center cover clockwise until hub cap: engages physically and audibly.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installed securely.

Changing a wheel 323

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Vehicles with AMG wheels and aluminum hub caps: X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 288).

X Position socket; on hub cap:. X Position lug wrench= on socket;. X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun- ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap: and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is in the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:. X Attach lug wrench= to socket; and tighten hub cap:. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrenchB until jackA sits completely on jacking point? and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrenchB until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

324 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

Removing a wheel ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam- age it. Therefore, you should proceed care- fully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt andwheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 321). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam- age it. Therefore, you should proceed care- fully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight.

Changing a wheel 325

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi- ble.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: toA). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 306).

i Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all mounted wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors for the tire pres- sure monitor.

Wheel-tire combination

You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been spe- cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may other- wise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehi- cle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam- age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any quali- fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

The recommended pressures for various oper- ating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pres- sures under various operating conditions (Y page 306). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance

326 Wheel-tire combination W he el s an d tir es

recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 289).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel-tire combination 327

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incor- rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid On vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi- tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos- est to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wir- ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup- plement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

328 Vehicle electronics Te ch ni ca ld at a

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the fol- lowing values:

Frequency band Maximum transmission

output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- sion output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- cle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle identification plate location (example: right-hand-drive vehicle) X Open the front left-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) : VIN ; Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) : VIN ; Paint code

Identification plates 329

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door. X Fold cover: down and remove it. You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca- tions: Ron the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 330) Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 329)

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank- case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali- fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci- ties

Important safety notes

G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must match. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indi- cate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40

330 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l)

Model Of which reserve

MercedesAMG vehicles Approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)

All other models Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam- age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.

! Do not use the following: RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol) RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.

Service products and filling capacities 331

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following pre- cautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 135).

Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and preven- tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label.More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- ded fuels that have additives. The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec- ification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those pre- scribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas after- treatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 330). The engine oils are matched to the performance ofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with main- tenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain- ers.

332 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

MercedesAMG S 63 4MATIC

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

MercedesAMG S 65

11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser- vice products when handling brake fluid (Y page 330). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replace- ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add anti- freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser- vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replace- ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: RAnti-corrosion protection RAntifreeze protection RRaising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 (-37 ), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 (130 ). The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 (-37 ). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

Service products and filling capacities 333

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

MercedesAMG S 63 4MATIC

13.0 US qt (12.3 l)

MercedesAMG S 65

16.1 US qt (15.2 l)

All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the level sensor may give a false reading. At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor- mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is fil- led with refrigerant R134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli- cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable SAE standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant

334 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Warning symbols: indicate: RPossible dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

All models 23.3 0.4 oz (660 10 g)

Model PAG oil

MercedesAMG vehicles

3.5 oz (100 g)

All other models 3.9 oz (110 g)

Vehicle data

General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

69.1 in (1755 mm)

All other models 68.9 in (1749 mm)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Vehicle length 198.6 in (5044 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

83.0 in (2108 mm)

Vehicle height 56.0 in (1422 mm)

Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945 mm)

Turning circle, Mercedes-AMGS63 4MATIC

39.0 ft (11.90 m)

Turning circle, Mercedes-AMG S 65

38.1 ft (11.60 m)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 197.9 in (5027 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

83.0 in (2108 mm)

Vehicle height 55.7 in (1414 mm)

Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945 mm)

Turning radius 38.1 ft (11.60 m)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle data 335

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Coupe Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz Coupe as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2017 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.